Yamaha S306 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: S306

Categorie: Barebones voor pc / werkstation

Type: de handleiding

IMPORTANT

—Check your power supply—

Make sure that your local AC

mains voltage matches the

voltage specified on the name

plate on the bottom panel. In

some areas a voltage selector

may be provided on the bottom

panel of the main keyboard unit

near the power cord. Make sure

that the voltage selector is set for

the voltage in your area. The

voltage selector is set at 240V

when the unit is initially shipped.

To change the setting use a

"minus" screwdriver to rotate the

selector dial so that the correct

voltage appears next to the

pointer on the panel.

For information on assembling

the keyboard stand, refer to the

instructions at the end of this

manual.

WICHTIG

—Überprüfen Sie Ihren

Netzanschluss—

Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die

Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen

Stromnetz mit der Spannung

übereinstimmt, die auf dem

Typenschild auf der Unterseite

des Instruments angegeben ist. In

bestimmten Regionen ist auf der

Unterseite des Keyboards in der

Nähe des Netzkabels ein

Spannungswähler angebracht.

Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der

Spannungswähler auf die

Spannung Ihres lokalen

Stromnetzes eingestellt ist. Dieser

Spannungswähler ist bei

Auslieferung auf 240 V

eingestellt. Sie können die

Einstellung mit einem

Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern.

Drehen Sie dazu den

Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf

dem Instrument auf die richtige

Spannung zeigt.

Weitere Informationen über die

Montage des Keyboard-Ständers

erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen

am Ende dieses Handbuchs.

IMPORTANT

—Contrôler la source

d'alimentation—

Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée

sur le panneau inférieur

correspond à la tension du

secteur. Dans certaines régions,

l'instrument peut être équipé d'un

sélecteur de tension situé sur le

panneau inférieur du clavier à

proximité du cordon

d'alimentation.

Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien

réglé en fonction de la tension

secteur de votre région. Le

sélecteur de tension est réglé sur

240 V au départ d'usine. Pour

modifier ce réglage, utilisez un

tournevis à lame plate pour

tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre

l'indication correspondant à la

tension de votre région vis à vis

du repère triangulaire situé sur le

panneau.

Pour obtenir des informations sur

l'assemblage du support du

clavier, reportez-vous aux

instructions à la fin de ce manuel.

IMPORTANTE

—Verifique la alimentación de

corriente—

Asegúrese de que tensión de

alimentación de CA de su área

corresponde con la tensión

especificada en la placa de

características del panel inferior.

En algunas zonas puede haberse

incorporado un selector de

tensión en el panel inferior de la

unidad del teclado principal,

cerca del cable de alimentación.

Asegúrese de que el selector de

tensión esté ajustado a la tensión

de su área. El selector de tensión

se ajusta a 240V cuando la

unidad sale de fábrica. Para

cambiar el ajuste, emplee un

destornillador de cabeza "recta"

para girar el selector de modo

que aparezca la tensión correcta

al lado del indicador del panel.

Para información sobre el

montaje del soporte del teclado,

consulte las instrucciones al final

de este manual.

CLP-370/340/330

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

OWNER’S MANUAL

CLP-S308/S306

ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISESPAÑOL

Introduction

92-469 1 (bottom)

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can

fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following:

Owner’s Manual (this book)

Introduction (page 2):

Please read this section ﬁrst.

Reference (page 16):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.

Appendix (page 98):

This section introduces reference material.

Data List

You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation

Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library.

Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as “CLP-370”) in the

Model Name text box, then click the Search button.

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

*The models CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this owner’s manual.

*The illustrations and LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat dif-

ferent from those on your instrument.

*The panel illustrations shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the CLP-370.

*Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited

except for your personal use.

(CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product.

(CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this

product.

Trademarks:

•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries.

•SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.

•All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE

data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted

under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

(1)B-12 1/2

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from

the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in

the instrument overheating.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-12 2/2

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• (For polish-ﬁnished model) Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do

not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument’s

ﬁnish.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping

cloths.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a

ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key

cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• (For polish-ﬁnished model) Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal,

porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to crack or peel. Use

caution.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this

can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism,

possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them

periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• Data in the instrument’s internal memory can be lost due to operational errors or

malfunction. Be sure to save any important data to external media via a

computer connected to the instrument. (page 78)

Backing up the USB Storage device

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two USB storage devices.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you

unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Accessories

• “50 greats for the Piano” (Music Book)

• Owner’s Manual

This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.

• Accessory CD-ROM for Windows

• Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide

• Bench

A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you ﬁll out the User Registration form.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as

it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit.

Tr ansport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument

to excessive vibration or shock.

CAUTION

(CLP-S308/S306) Cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) packaged with the instrument before closing

the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument is transported.

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Features

Highly evolved touch and expression: Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard (CLP-330)

and Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard with artiﬁcial ivory top (CLP-340, CLP-S306)

The Graded Hammer keyboard features natural grand-piano type key weights (heavier in the low range and lighter in

the higher range) providing a pleasant playability that is unmatched by conventional electronic pianos.

The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for legato (without pedal operation) and repetitive-

striking techniques, as with a grand piano. The CLP-340 and CLP-S306 feature an “artiﬁcial ivory” keyboard top,

which simulates the moderate hygroscopic characteristics of real ivory and offers a less slippery surface, smooth key

movement, and a warm and inviting color.

Ultimate natural playability: Natural Wood (NW) keyboard with artiﬁcial ivory top

(CLP-370, CLP-S308)

In addition to the features offered by the GH3 keyboard with artiﬁcial ivory top model, the NW keyboard uses natural

wood for the inside of the white keys, as seen on an acoustic piano. This feature provides a heavier weighted touch

that surpasses that of conventional electronic pianos and is closer in feel to a grand piano.

Digital recording of a full-size concert grand piano sound (via AMW Dynamics

Stereo Sampling)

This digital piano offers a rich and versatile range of sounds, which are created using Yamaha's proprietary sampling

tone-generation system, “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling.”

AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) is a sampling system that creates sounds close to those of an acoustic instrument by

digitally recording the sounds of an instrument and applying high-quality digital ﬁltering technology to the recorded

audio samples.

The sound waveform created by an acoustic piano differs depending on the player's strength of touch, from

pianissimo to fortissimo.

AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling can create extremely dynamic nuances by recording samples at various playing

strengths. The greater the number of samples used, the greater the resulting expressiveness of the instrument.

The piano voice “Grand Piano 1” features a totally new sample recorded from a full-size concert grand piano. Each

note in the sample has been adjusted meticulously so that the digital piano will play only the very best piano sounds.

The piano voices are well-separated sounds featuring a fast attack and a satisfying response.

The “Grand Piano 1” voice features multiple wave samples for different velocities (Dynamic Sampling). That is,

different samples are used depending on how fast or strong the player strikes the keys. Therefore, this voice

expresses detailed dynamics and sounds much closer to those of a true acoustic piano.

The CLP-370/340 creates a rich, luxurious sound using “Sustain Sampling,” which is a sample of the soundboard

and the resonance of the strings when the damper pedal is pressed. The instrument also features “Key-off Sampling,”

which is a sample of the very delicate noises that are caused when keys are released.

Internet Direct Connection function (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

You can connect these digital piano models to the Internet, enabling you to access and enjoy a broad range of song

data ﬁles that are available on a dedicated website.

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Table of Contents

Introduction

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List.............................................................................. 3

Accessories............................................................................................................................... 6

Panel Controls and Terminals ............................................................................................... 10

Before Using the Clavinova................................................................................................... 12

Key Cover.....................................................................................................................................................12

Music Rest....................................................................................................................................................13

Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ......................................................................................................................14

Turning the Power On ................................................................................................................................14

Setting the Volume ......................................................................................................................................15

Using Headphones.......................................................................................................................................15

Using the Speaker Switch ............................................................................................................................ 15

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................. 16

Reference

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................................................... 17

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) ....................................18

A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs...................................................................................................................19

Selecting & Playing Voices .................................................................................................... 20

Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................20

Using the Pedals...........................................................................................................................................21

Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/

[EFFECT]/[DAMPER RES.] .......................................................................................................................22

Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH].................................................................................................................. 24

Transposition — [TRANSPOSE] ...............................................................................................................25

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ........................................................................................................26

Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340) ............27

Using the Metronome .................................................................................................................................29

Recording Your Performance................................................................................................ 30

Recording a performance quickly...............................................................................................................30

Playing back a recorded song......................................................................................................................32

Re-recording a previously recorded song................................................................................................... 32

Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts ...............................................................................................................33

Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) ...............................................35

Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device......................................................................... 36

About Save and Load...................................................................................................................................36

Saving a Song ...............................................................................................................................................37

Loading a Song.............................................................................................................................................38

Deleting Song Files ......................................................................................................................................39

Formatting the USB Storage Device ...........................................................................................................40

Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc.) ............................................41

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks.......................................................................42

Playing Back Songs................................................................................................................ 43

Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument...............................................................................44

Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device ...............................................................................45

Useful Playback Functions ..........................................................................................................................45

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ............................................... 46

Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection ..................................................................................46

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet................................................................................................ 48

About the Internet Settings .........................................................................................................................49

Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) ..................................................51

Exporting the Connection Information .....................................................................................................52

Other Internet Operations .......................................................................................................................... 53

Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ................................... 56

Glossary of Internet Terms..........................................................................................................................57

Initializing the data......................................................................................................................................58

Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] ......................................................................................... 59

Basic Procedure in Function Mode ............................................................................................................60

About Each Function................................................................................................................................... 62

F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch.................................................................................................................. 62

F2. Selecting a Scale ...............................................................................................................................63

F3. Dual Mode Functions......................................................................................................................64

F4. (CLP-370/340) Split Mode Functions ............................................................................................65

F5. (CLP-370/340) / F4. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Other Functions ..............................................66

F6. (CLP-370/340) / F5. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Metronome Volume .......................................67

F7. (CLP-370/340) / F6. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Functions .............................................. 67

F8. (CLP-370/340) / F7. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Backup Functions............................................70

F8.5 (CLP-370/340)/ F7.5 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Character Code ............................................70

F9. (CLP-370/340)/ F8. (CLP-S308/S306) LAN Settings .....................................................................70

Connections........................................................................................................................... 71

Connectors...................................................................................................................................................71

Connection to a USB storage device........................................................................................................... 73

Connecting a Personal Computer ..............................................................................................................75

Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument................................ 76

Loading Song Data from a Computer to the Instrument.......................................................................... 76

Transmitting Song Data from the Instrument to a Computer .................................................................77

Data Backup........................................................................................................................... 78

Message List .......................................................................................................................... 79

Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 80

Options .................................................................................................................................. 80

CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly ..................................................................................... 81

CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................. 84

CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly.......................................................................... 87

Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340).................................................... 91

Preset Voice List .................................................................................................................... 92

Demo Song List ..................................................................................................................... 95

Index...................................................................................................................................... 96

Appendix

Factory Setting List................................................................................................................ 98

Specifications....................................................................................................................... 100

Panel Controls and Terminals

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Panel Controls and Terminals

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

# %$

(

7 @

8 )

2 3

!645

CLP-370/340/330

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

MIDI

OUT

THRU

AUX IN

L/L+R

AUX OUT

™

(

∞

The panel illustrations shown are taken from the CLP-370.

This illustration shown is taken from the

CLP-370.

Front

Pedal jack for CLP-340/330 is next

to the MIDI jacks.

Pedal jack for CLP-S308/S306 is

next to the LAN Jack.

Shows the jacks as seen when viewed from below the

instrument.

Shows the jacks as seen when viewed

from below the instrument.

CLP-370/340 only

CLP-370/

340 only

Left Right

CLP-370/

340 only

Front

CLP-S308/S306

™

¡º §

Panel Controls and Terminals

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

1 [POWER] switch .............................page 14

2 [MASTER VOLUME] slider..............page 15

Adjust the volume level using this slider.

3 [DEMO] button ..............................page 16

Demonstration playback is available for each voice.

4 [TRANSPOSE] button.....................page 25

You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or

down so that the pitch will match that of another

instrument or singer, while you play the same,

unshifted keys.

5 [REC] button .................................page 30

For recording your keyboard performance.

6 [RIGHT], [LEFT] buttons

............................................... pages 18, 33

For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as

required so you can practice the corresponding part

(the part that is turned off) on the keyboard.

7 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons

............................................... pages 16, 44

For playing back the preset songs or your recorded

songs, etc. You can also play back songs from the

Internet over a special website.

8 [SONG SELECT] button ......... pages 17, 56

For selecting a song to play back or edit.

9 [FILE] button ......................... pages 36, 40

For saving songs to and loading songs from a USB

storage device, as well as managing song ﬁles. Also,

lets you format a USB storage device.

)

[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button

............................................... pages 29, 60

For changing the song tempo (speed) and selecting

other useful functions (pages 59 – 70).

! [METRONOME] button

............................................... pages 29, 67

For using the metronome.

@ Display............................................page 14

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power to the instrument while

ﬂashing dashes appear in the display (indicating the

operation is in process). Doing so may damage the

data.

# [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons

For setting values or performing ﬁle operations.

Pressing both buttons simultaneously for certain

value settings (Transpose, Tempo, etc.) restores the

default value.

$ Voice group buttons ......................page 20

For selecting voices from 14 internal sounds includ-

ing Grand Piano 1 and 2. You can also combine two

voices and use them together. (Only the CLP-370 and

CLP-340 has the [VARIATION] button.)

% [SPLIT] button (CLP-370/340).......page 27

For playing different voices on the left- and right-

hand sections of the keyboard.

^ [BRILLIANCE], [REVERB], [EFFECT]

buttons .......................................... page 22

For adjusting the brightness of the sound and adding

reverb effects to the sound.

& [TOUCH] button ............................ page 24

For adjusting the touch response.

* [DAMPER RES.] button ................. page 23

For turning the Damper Resonance function on or

off. When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simu-

lates the sustain sound that occurs when you press

the damper pedal of a grand piano, as you press the

damper pedal and play the keyboard.

( USB [TO DEVICE] terminals........... page 72

For connecting the instrument to a USB storage

device, allowing saving/loading of data to and from

the connected device. On the CLP-370 and CLP-340,

there are two TO DEVICE terminals, A and B, which

can be speciﬁed using the [SELECT] switch.

º AUX OUT [L/ L+R][R] jacks ............ page 71

For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to an

external audio system.

¡ AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ............... page 72

For connecting an external tone generator, allowing

you to play the sound of that device via the Clavi-

nova’s internal sound system and speakers.

™ USB [TO HOST] terminal .............. page 72

For connecting the instrument to your computer,

allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the

Clavinova and the computer.

£ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals

....................................................... page 72

For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the

use of various MIDI functions.

¢ [PHONES] jacks, [SPEAKER] switch

....................................................... page 15

For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones,

allowing private practice. The [SPEAKER] switch

turns the internal speakers on or off.

∞ PEDALS........................................... page 21

For producing a range of expressive effects similar to

those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

The left pedal can also be assigned to a variety of

functions.

§ [LAN] jack (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

....................................................... page 72

For connecting a LAN cable to access special Internet

websites for this instrument, and playing songs from

the Internet.

¶ [PEDAL] jack .................................. page 83

For connecting a pedal cable.

Before Using the Clavinova

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Before Using the Clavinova

Key Cover

CLP-370/340/330

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over

the keys.

CLP-S308/S306

To open the key cover:

1. Hold the front edge of the key cover top with both

hands, then open the key cover slowly.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers (or those of children)

when opening or closing it.

2. Close the edge of the key cover. (Fold it down so that it

is ﬂat with the cover.)

To close the key cover:

1. If the music rest is unfolded, fold it back.

2. Unfold the edge of the key cover.

3. Hold the key cover with both hands and close it

slowly.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers (or those of children)

when opening or closing it.

Be careful to avoid catching your

ﬁngers when opening or closing the

cover.

Before Using the Clavinova

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Music Rest

CLP-370/340/330

To raise the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear

of the music rest.

3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To lower the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When low-

ering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest

until it is all the way down.

CLP-S308/S306

Unfold the music rest

When opening the key cover, unfold the music rest.

Fold the music rest

When closing the key cover, fold the music rest.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers or the ﬁngers of child when opening or closing it.

CAUTION

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover

may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric

shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

CAUTION

Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] A terminal before closing the key

cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device.

CAUTION

(CLP-S308/S306) When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87)

before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched.

Before Using the Clavinova

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Music Braces (CLP-370/340)

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

Tur ning the Power On

1.Connect the power cord.

Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC IN on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet.

In some areas, a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

Make sure your instrument is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on

the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main

keyboard unit near the AC IN. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to

the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the Clavinova. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced,

contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the Clavinova may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased.

(In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT

modify the plug provided with the Clavinova. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed

electrician.

2.Turn the power on.

Press the [POWER] switch.

•The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again.

•The display and the power indicator turn off.

NOTE

Power indicator

If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is

still on.

To open To close

1-1 1-2

(The shape of plug differs

depending on locale.)

(bottom surface)

CLP-370/340/330

Shows the AC IN as

seen when viewed from

below the instrument.

CLP-S308/S306

AC IN is located on the

rear of the instrument.

Display

Power indicator

[POWER] switch

Normally indicates tempo.

Before Using the Clavinova

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Setting the Volume

Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about halfway between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you

start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level.

CAUTION

Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time; doing so may damage your hearing.

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the

[PHONES] jacks.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.

You can connect two sets of standard stereo head-

phones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones,

you can plug them into either jack.)

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the Clavinova pack-

age so that you can conveniently hang the headphones

on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using

included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other than the headphones on

the hanger. Doing so may damage the Clavinova or the

hanger.

Using the Speaker Switch

This switch turns the internal speakers on or off.

NORMAL (HP. SW) ......... The speakers produce sound as long as a pair of

headphones is not connected.

ON ....................................... The speakers always produce sound.

OFF ...................................... The speakers produce no sound.

TERMINOLOGY

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the entire keyboard sound.

NOTE

You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX OUT level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

The level decreases. The level increases.

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

standard

stereo

phone plug

bottom surface

PHONES

SPEAKER

NORMAL

OFF

HP. SW

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the Clavinova’s voices.

1. Turn the power on.

(In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] switch.

When the power is turned ON, one of the voice button LEDs will light.

Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about half way between the “MIN”

and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER

VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level.

2. Engage Demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage Demo mode. The voice button indicators

will ﬂash in sequence.

3. Play a Voice demo.

Press one of the voice buttons to start playback of all songs starting from the

corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that

voice button. (If you press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button instead of a voice

button or only waiting (not press any keys) a short while, the GRAND PIANO 1

demo tune will begin playback.)

4. Stop the Voice demo and exit from Demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] or SONG [STOP] button.

CLP

370

Procedure

NOTE

For a list of the demo songs, see

page 95.

NOTE

MIDI reception is not possible in

Demo Song mode.

Demo song data is not transmitted

via the MIDI terminals.

NOTE

Demo mode cannot be engaged

during User song recording

(page 30) or ﬁle operations (page

36).

TERMINOLOGY

Mode:

A mode is a status under which

you can execute a certain function.

In Demo mode, you can play back

demonstration tunes.

NOTE

You cannot adjust the tempo of

demo songs.

You cannot use the part cancel

function (page 18) or the song

A-B repeat function (page 19) in

Demo mode.

NOTE

On the CLP-370/340, you can

demo the piano voices with vari-

ous effects by pressing the

[VARIATION] button, then press-

ing the desired voice button.

Refer to the “Piano Voice Demo

Description” on page 95 for the

complete list of demo sounds for

the piano voices with various

effects.

Reference

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can simply listen to these songs

or use them for practice (page 18). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” that

contains scores for the 50 piano preset songs.

1. Engage Preset Song mode.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button a few times until the “PRESET” indicator

lights.

2. Play any of the 50 preset songs.

2-1 Press the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select a number of the tune you want to

play (the number will appear on the LED display) or select a playing method.

1 – 50: Select a preset song number and play only the song.

r n d: Play all preset songs continuously in random order.

ALL: Play all preset songs in sequence.

2-2 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

Adjust the Volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume.

Adjust the Tempo

You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼,

▲]

buttons to adjust the playback tempo

as required. The default tempo can be

recalled by simultaneously pressing the

[▼] and [▲] buttons.

3. Stop playback.

Playback will stop automatically when the selected preset song has ﬁnished. To

stop the song during playback (or continuous playback), press the SONG

[STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button.

•To play back another song continuously, see procedure 2 above.

4. Exit from Preset Song mode.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button to exit Preset Song mode. The indicator

turns off, and the unit returns to normal play mode.

How to use the practice functions

You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the

corresponding part (part cancel function) and continuously repeat a speciﬁed phrase

within a song (song A-B repeat function). For more information, see pages 18–19.

CLP

370

42-1

2-23

Procedure

NOTE

Preset Song mode cannot be

engaged while the unit is in Demo

Song mode (page 16) or during

song playback (page 44), User

song recording (page 30), or ﬁle

operations (page 36).

TERMINOLOGY

Song:

Performance data is called a

“Song.” This includes demonstra-

tion tunes and piano preset tunes.

NOTE

You can play the keyboard along

with the preset song. You can

change the voice playing on the

keyboard.

NOTE

You can adjust the Brilliance con-

trol (page 22) and Reverb type

(page 22) that is applied to preset

song playback.

You can change the Effect set-

tings (page 23) and Touch sensi-

tivity (page 24) for the keyboard

voice you play.

NOTE

The default tempo “0” is automati-

cally selected whenever a new

preset song is selected, or when

playback of a new preset song

begins during “ALL” or “r n d”

playback.

NOTE

When you select a different song

(or a different song is selected

during chained playback), appro-

priate reverb and effect types will

be selected accordingly.

This produces a relative tempo varia-

tion, with a range from “–50” through

“0” to “50” at maximum; the range will

differ depending on the selected

song.

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs

(Part Cancel Function)

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the

left- and right-hand parts on or off as desired, in order to practice the corresponding part (the part

that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part

is played by [LEFT].

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button to turn

off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up, indi-

cating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to

turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corre-

sponding part playback is muted.

•Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles playback between on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you

just turned off.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard

(Sync Start)

When the Sync Start function is engaged, playback of the selected preset song will

begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard.

To engage the Sync Start function, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP]

and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.)

Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard.

Left Pedal Play/Pause

The left pedal can be assigned to play and pause preset song playback via the

“Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66.

3. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the

top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the

SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG

[PLAY/PAUSE]

button.

CLP

370

NOTE

The Preset Song Part Cancel

function cannot be used during

“ALL” or “r n d” (page 17) play-

back.

NOTE

The parts can be turned on or off

even during playback.

Procedure

NOTE

Both parts are automatically

turned ON whenever a new song

is selected.

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs

The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a speciﬁed phrase within a preset song.

Combined with the Part Cancel function described on page 18, this provides an excellent way to

practice difﬁcult phrases.

1. Specify the beginning (A) and the end (B) of the

phrase, and start practicing.

Select and play a preset song, then press the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION] button at the beginning of the phrase

you want to repeat.

This sets the “A” point ( will appear on the dis-

play).

To specify the end (B) of the phrase, press the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button a second time at the

end of the phrase.

This sets the “B” point ( will appear on the dis-

play).

At this point, repeat playback will begin between the

speciﬁed A and B points.

2. Stop playback.

Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback while retaining the speciﬁed

A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if you press the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button.

To cancel the A and B points, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button once.

CLP

370

Procedure

NOTE

The A-B Repeat function cannot

be used during “ALL” or “r n d”

(page 17) playback.

NOTE

•To set the “A” point at the very

beginning of the song, press

the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] but-

ton before starting playback.

•You can have the B point auto-

matically be set to the song’s

end, by setting the A point and

letting the song play to the end.

NOTE

An automatic lead-in (to help

guide you into the phrase) starts

at the A point of the song.

NOTE

The A and B points are automati-

cally canceled when a new song

is selected.

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Selecting & Playing Voices

Selecting Voices

Select the desired voice by pressing one of the Voice buttons.

Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider for the most

comfortable listening level.

CLP

370

Voice buttons

Procedure

NOTE

To learn characteristics of the

voices, listen to demo songs for

each voice (page 16). Refer to

“Preset Voice List” on page 92 for

more information on the charac-

teristics of each preset voice.

TERMINOLOGY

Voice:

On the Clavinova, a voice means

a “tone” or “tonal color.”

NOTE

You can control the loudness of a

voice by adjusting the force with

which you strike the keys,

although different playing styles

(touch sensitivities) have little or

no effect with certain musical

instruments.

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on

page 92.

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Using the Pedals

The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range

of expressive effects similar to those produced by the

pedals on an acoustic piano.

Damper (Right) Pedal

The damper pedal functions in the same way as a

damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper

pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal

immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive

half-pedal function.

When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simulates the

sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper

pedal of a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal

and play the keyboard.

Sostenuto (Center) Pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the

sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes

will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the

damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently

played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible

to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are

played “staccato.”

Soft (Left) Pedal

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while

the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it

is pressed.

NOTE

If the damper pedal doesn’t work,

make sure that the pedal cord is

properly plugged into the jack

(pages 83, 86).

TERMINOLOGY:

Half-pedal:

While playing the piano with Sus-

tain and you want to slightly mute

the sustained sound, release the

damper pedal from maximum

position to half position.

NOTE

The depth of the effect produced

by the “Sustain Samples” can be

adjusted via the “Sustain Sample

Depth” (page 66) in Function

mode.















When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you

play before you release the

pedal have a longer sustain.

NOTE

Organ, string and choir voices will

continue to sound for as long as

the sostenuto pedal is depressed.















When you press the soste-

nuto pedal here while hold-

ing the note, the note will

sustain as long as you hold

the pedal.

NOTE

The left pedal can be assigned to

song play/pause operation or

variation function (CLP-370/340)

via the “Left Pedal Mode”

described on page 66.

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION]

(CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[EFFECT]/

[DAMPER RES.]

[VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)

Lets you alter another aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type.

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92 for more information on the characteristics of

each variation.

Pressing the [VARIATION] or selected voice button toggles the variation on and off.

The indicator lights (ON) when [VARIATION] is enabled.

[BRILLIANCE]

This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre” of the sound output.

BRIGHT: Bright tone

NORMAL: Standard tone

MELLOW: Soft and mellow tone

To select a brilliance type, press the [BRILLIANCE] button a few times until the indica-

tor corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicator lights in sequence each time

you press the [BRILLIANCE] button). Brilliance can be selected among ﬁve types. When

two adjacent indicators are lit, the type that is between the two indicated types is

selected. For example, when both NORMAL and MELLOW are lit, the brilliance set-

ting between NORMAL and MELLOW is selected. This parameter affects the entire

sound of the instrument.

[REVERB]

This control enables you to select various digital reverb effects that would add extra

depth and expression to the sound to create a realistic acoustic ambience.

OFF: When no reverb effect is selected, no REVERB indicator is lit.

ROOM: This setting adds a continuous reverb effect to the sound, similar to the

acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room.

HALL 1: For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates

the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall.

HALL 2: For a truly spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simu-

lates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall.

STAGE: Simulates the reverb of a stage environment.

CLP

370

[–/NO] [+/YES]

buttons

[VARIATION] button

[REVERB]

button

[BRILLIANCE]

button

[EFFECT]

button

[DAMPER RES.]

button

NOTE

Normal setting = OFF

TERMINOLOGY

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers to the

default setting (factory setting)

obtained when you ﬁrst turn on

the power to the Clavinova.

NOTE

The left pedal can be assigned to

ON or OFF the variation via the

“Left Pedal Mode” function

described on page 66.

NOTE

Normal setting = NORMAL

NOTE

When the BRILLIANCE is set to

BRIGHT, the overall sound will be

slightly louder. If the MASTER

VOLUME is set at a high level the

sound may become distorted. If

so, lower the MASTER VOLUME

level.

Procedure

NOTE

The default reverb type (including

OFF) and depth settings are dif-

ferent for each voice.

NOTE

Releasing the [REVERB] button

changes the reverb type.

If you have changed the reverb

depth, releasing the [REVERB]

button will not change the reverb

type.

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

To select an reverb type, press the [REVERB] button a few times until the indicator cor-

responding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you

press the [REVERB] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off.

Adjusting Reverb Depth

Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons

while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The cur-

rent depth setting appears on the LED display while the [REVERB] button is held.

[EFFECT]

The [EFFECT] button allows you to select an effect to give your sound greater depth

and animation.

OFF: When no effect is selected, no EFFECT indicator is lit.

CHORUS: A shimmering, broadening effect

PHASER: Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

TREMOLO: Tremolo effect

ROTARY SP: Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker.

To select an effect type, press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corre-

sponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press

the [EFFECT] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off.

Adjusting Effect Depth

You can adjust the effect depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES]

buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button.

The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED

display while the [EFFECT] button is held.

[DAMPER RES.]

The Damper Resonance lets you hear a simulation of the sustain sound of the damper

pedal on a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard.

This effect is applied to the entire sound of the instrument.

Pressing the [DAMPER RES.] button repeatedly toggles the Damper Resonance on and

off.

Adjusting DAMPER RES. Depth

You can adjust the Damper Resonance depth by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons

while holding the [DAMPER RES.] button.

The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED

display while the [DAMPER RES.] button is held.

Procedure

NOTE

Depth 0: no effect

Depth 20: maximum reverb depth

NOTE

The default effect type (including

OFF) and depth settings are dif-

ferent for each voice.

NOTE

Releasing the [EFFECT] button

changes the effect type.

If you have changed the depth

settings, releasing the [EFFECT]

button will not change the effect

type.

Procedure

NOTE

Depth 0: no effect

Depth 20: maximum effect depth

NOTE

Default depth settings are differ-

ent for each voice.

NOTE

Normal setting = ON

NOTE

Depth 0: no effect

Depth 20: maximum depth

Procedure

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH]

You can select four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED

— to match different playing styles and preferences.

HARD:

Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness.

MEDIUM: Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response.

SOFT:

Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure.

FIXED:

All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard

is played. (No indicators are lit.) The ﬁxed volume can be changed.

To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indica-

tor corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time

the [TOUCH] button is pressed). No indicator is lit when “FIXED” is selected.

Changing the volume when FIXED is selected

When you select FIXED, you can set the volume for notes

played

in FIXED mode by using the

[–/NO]

and

[+/YES]

buttons while

you hold the

[TOUCH]

button. The current volume

level

appears on the display. The volume range is from 1 through 127.

The default setting is 64.

NOTE

This setting does not change the

weight of the keyboard.

NOTE

Normal setting = MEDIUM

NOTE

The touch sensitivity type will

become the common setting for

all voices. However, the touch

sensitivity settings may have little

or no effect with certain voices

that are not normally responsive

to keyboard dynamics. (Refer to

the “Preset Voice List” on page

92.)

CLP

370

[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons

[TOUCH] button

Procedure

NOTE

1: minimum volume

127: maximum volume

NOTE

The touch volume set in FIXED

mode will become the common

setting for all voices.

NOTE

Releasing the [TOUCH] button

changes the touch type.

If you have changed the volume,

releasing the [TOUCH] button will

not change the touch type.

(FIXED mode will remain

selected.)

Volume range

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Transposition — [TRANSPOSE]

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or

down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and to let you easily

match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you

set the transposition amount to “5,” playing a C key produces a pitch of F. In this way, you can play

a song as though it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to F major.

Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] button while holding the

[TRANSPOSE] button to transpose down or up as required.

The amount of transposition appears on the LED display

while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose

setting is “0.”

The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than “0”

is selected. If a value other than “0” is selected, the [TRANSPOSE] button can be

switched the transpose function ON or OFF at any time.

CLP

370

[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons [TRANSPOSE] button

Procedure

TERMINOLOGY

Transpose:

Change the key signature of a

song. On the Clavinova, transpos-

ing shifts the pitch of the entire

keyboard.

NOTE

The transposition range:

–12: –12 semitones (down one

octave)

0: normal pitch

12: 12 semitones (up one octave)

Transposition

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you

can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound.

1. Engage Dual mode.

Press two voice buttons at the same time (or press one voice button while holding

another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when Dual mode

is active.

•According to the voice numbering

priority shown in the diagram on

the right, the lower value voice

number will be designated as Voice

1 (the other voice will be desig-

nated as Voice 2).

The Function mode provides access to a number of other Dual mode functions,

such as volume balance setting or octave setting (page 64). (If you do not set

Dual mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by

default.)

2. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice button.

CLP

370

Procedure

NOTE (CLP-370/340)

Dual and Split (page 27) modes

cannot be engaged at the same

time.

NOTE

[VARIATION] in Dual Mode

(CLP-370/340)

The [VARIATION] button’s indica-

tor will light if the variation is

engaged for either or both of the

Dual mode voices. While Dual

mode is engaged, the [VARIA-

TION] button can be used to turn

the variation for both voices on or

off. To turn the variation on or off

for only one of the voices, hold

the voice button for the other

voice and press the button of the

voice for which you want to

change the variation.

NOTE

[REVERB] in Dual Mode

The reverb type assigned to

Voice 1 will take priority over the

other. (If the reverb is set to OFF,

Voice 2 reverb type will be in

effect.)

NOTE

[EFFECT] in Dual Mode

Depending on the conditions, one

effect type may take priority over

the other. Depth will be decided

according to the depth default

value of the voice combination.

However, using function F3 (page

64) you can adjust the depth

value for each voice to your liking.

12 13 14

34567

891011

Voice numbering priority

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different

Vo ices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340)

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and

another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric

Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand.

1. Engage Split mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The default setting (WOOD

BASS)

will be selected for the left-hand voice at ﬁrst.

The Function mode provides access to a number of other Split mode functions

(page 65). (If you make no settings for Split mode functions, the appropriate

setting will be set in each voice by default.)

2. Specify the split point (the border between the

right-and left-hand range).

(The split point is initially set at the F#2 key by default. If you do not need to

change the split point, skip this procedure.)

You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while hold-

ing the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the

LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held).

An example of split-point key display

CLP

370

Voice buttons [SPLIT] button

Procedure

NOTE

Dual (page 26) and Split modes

cannot be engaged simulta-

neously.

NOTE

A speciﬁed “split point” key is

included in the left-hand range.

The split point can also be

changed by simultaneously hold-

ing down the [SPLIT] button and

pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES]

button.

The default split point can be

recalled by simultaneously hold-

ing down the [SPLIT] button and

pressing both the [–/NO] and [+/

YES] buttons together.

NOTE

The split point can also be set via

Function 4 (page 65).

followed by a high bar if sharp

followed by a low bar if ﬂat

F 2

F#2

Eb2

A -1 C1 C2 F#2C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

Normal setting=F#2

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

3. Select a voice for the right hand.

Press a voice button.

4. Select a voice for the left hand.

Press the corresponding voice button while holding the [SPLIT] button. (The

indicator of the Left Voice button will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed.)

To turn the variation on or off for the split voice, hold the [SPLIT] button and

press the [VARIATION] button or the currently-selected voice button.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out.

NOTE

[VARIATION] in Split Mode

You can turn the variation on or off

for Split mode voices. Normally,

the voice indicator of the right

voice lights in Split mode. The

[VARIATION] can be used to turn

the variation for the right voice on

or off as required. While the

[SPLIT] button is held, however,

the voice indicator of the left voice

lights. In this state the [VARIA-

TION] button turns the variation

for the left voice on or off.

NOTE

[REVERB] in Split Mode

The reverb type assigned to the

right voice will take priority over

the other. (If the reverb of the right

voice is set to OFF, the left voice’s

reverb type will be in effect.)

NOTE

[EFFECT] in Split Mode

Depending on the conditions, one

effect type will take priority over

the other. The depth will be

decided according to the depth

default value of the voice combi-

nation. However, using function

F4 (page 65) you can change the

depth value for each voice as you

like. Effect depth setting via the

panel controls (i.e. pressing the

[–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while

holding the [EFFECT] button —

will be applied to the right voice

only.

Selecting & Playing Voices

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Using the Metronome

The Clavinova features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is conve-

nient for practicing.

1. Start the metronome.

The metronome sound is turned on by pressing

the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

Adjusting the tempo

The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is

described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by

using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons (when the [TEMPO/FUNCTION

▼, ▲]

button’s [TEMPO] indicator is lit).

Adjusting the time signature

The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be

set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while

holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. You

can set the beat from 0 to 15. The current setting

appears on the LED display while you are holding

the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

A beat setting of “0” plays a low click sound for all beats, while a setting of “1”

plays a high click sound for all beats; other beat settings play a high click for the

ﬁrst beat in a measure and a low click for all following beats.

2. Stop the metronome.

Turn off the metronome by pressing the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

CLP

370

[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▲▼] buttons

Procedure

The beat indicator ﬂashes

at the current tempo.

NOTE

If the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] but-

ton’s [TEMPO] indicator is not lit,

press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION]

button to light the [TEMPO] indi-

cator.

NOTE

The volume of the metronome can

be adjusted via the Metronome

Volume function in Function mode

(page 67).

Beat

Recording Your Performance

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Recording Your Performance

The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the instru-

ment can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just

the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing

back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two

parts separately, you could record the left-and right-hand parts sepa-

rately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they sound when

played back. The two-part Song Recorder on the instrument allows the

recording of up to three User songs (U01 – U03) to the instrument.

User songs can be saved to an optional USB storage device.

Recording a performance quickly

This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without

specifying the recording parts — useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces.

In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to right part.

CAUTION

To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s):

If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song.

Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data.

You cannot record the performance to the connected USB storage device directly. The

recorded songs are saved to the instrument automatically. If you want to save data to

the device, perform the Save operation (page 37) after stopping recording.

CLP

370

2 4 4 3

TERMINOLOGY

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the

Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. The Clavinova “saves” information regarding note

timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the

Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova

may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “record-

ing” because it seems to make more sense.

Recording Your Performance

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

1. Make all the initial settings.

Before you begin to record, select the voice you want to record (or voices if you

will be using Dual or Split mode). Make any other desired settings (reverb,

effect, etc.) as well. You might also want to set the volume.

You can also adjust the playback volume using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

2. Engage Record Ready mode.

Press the [REC] button to engage Record Ready mode. This automatically selects

an empty song for recording and makes the RIGHT part active. If an empty

song does not exist, Song U01 will be selected. Recording does not actually start

yet.

The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will ﬂash at the current METRONOME

tempo setting.

You can turn on the metronome in this step, and adjust the tempo by using the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons. (Range: 32 – 280)

Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC]

button again.

3. Start recording.

Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard

or press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The current measure’s number will

appear on the display while recording.

4. Stop recording.

Press either [REC] or SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. When recording is

stopped, dashes appear in the display in succession to indicate that the recorded

data is being saved to the instrument automatically. After the data is saved, the

song name (U01 – U03) appears in the display. The recorded part’s indicator

will glow green to indicate that it now contains data. (Record mode is disen-

gaged automatically.)

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power of the instrument when dashes appear in the display in suc-

cession. Doing so may delete all song data in the instrument, including external songs

(page 43).

Procedure

NOTE

When the instrument is in Demo

Song mode or during a ﬁle opera-

tion, Record mode cannot be

engaged.

NOTE

Recording capacity

You can record up to a maximum

three songs, or up to a maximum

of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in

each song on the instrument

depending on pedal usage and

other factors.

NOTE

If you have selected the LEFT

part previously in the same song,

the LEFT part will automatically

be made active when pressing

the [REC] button in step 2.

NOTE

If the metronome was on when

you started recording, you’ll be

able to keep time with the metro-

nome while recording, but the

metronome sound will not be

recorded.

NOTE

For more recording information,

see page 34.

NOTE

The left pedal can be assigned to

start recording via the “Left Pedal

Mode” function described on

page 66.

NOTE

If the memory becomes full dur-

ing recording, “FUL” will appear

on the display and recording will

stop automatically. (All recorded

data up to that point will be

retained.)

Recording Your Performance

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Playing back a recorded song

1. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance.

2. Stop the performance.

To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button.

Re-recording a previously recorded song

This section explains how to record again in case your performance

was not satisfactory.

1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for

recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 1 on page 31 if you wish to change the previous settings.

For more information of the recorded data see page 34.

2. Re-engage Record Ready mode.

Press the [REC] button, again.

The selected part’s indicator lights in red.

Follow the procedure from Step 3 in “Recording a performance quickly” on

page 31 to re-record.

Procedure

NOTE

If you want to change the tempo,

reverb type, or effect type when

re-recording a part or when

recording to another part, do so

after you engage Record Ready

mode.

You cannot re-record in the mid-

dle of a song.

Deleting a selected part

Pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording, then pressing the SONG

[STOP] button to stop recording will erase all previously recorded data on the selected

part.

Recording Your Performance

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts

This lets you record the right and left parts separately. Since you can record the left part while play-

ing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet.

1. Make all the initial settings.

Same as step 1 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31.

2. Select a song to record.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button to light “USER” indicator on, then press the

[–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song for recording.

CAUTION

To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s):

If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song.

Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data.

3. Engage Record Ready mode.

Press the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button to engage

Record Ready mode. Recording does not actually start yet.

The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will ﬂash at the current METRONOME

tempo setting.

Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC]

button again.

4. Start and stop recording.

Same as step 3 – 4 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31.

NOTE

Part button indications

Off: Contains no data

On (green): Contains data

On (red): Part is enabled for

recording

NOTE

Recording capacity

You can record up to a maximum

three songs, or up to a maximum

of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in

each song on the instrument

depending on pedal usage and

other factors.

NOTE

If the metronome was on when

you started recording, you’ll be

able to keep time with the metro-

nome while recording, but the

metronome sound will not be

recorded.

NOTE

If you want to change the time

signature, make sure to change it

before entering Record Ready

mode.

If you want to change the tempo,

reverb type, or effect type when

rerecording a part or when

recording to another part, do so

after entering Record Ready

mode.

The Time Signature of a recorded

song cannot be changed. If you

want to record a song with

another Time Signature, ﬁrst save

a song to USB storage (see page

37), and delete the recorded

both parts of the song (see page

32, Deleting a selected part), then

set the desired time signature,

and begin a new recording.

NOTE

If you don’t want to hear the previ-

ously recorded part while you

record (for example, when you

want to record a song different

from what you recorded on the

previous part), press the play-

back part button before pressing

the [REC] button so that its indi-

cator is turned off.

For more information on record-

ing, see page 34.

Procedure

Recording Your Performance

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

The user song recorder records the following data:

Data in addition to the notes and voices you play is recorded.

This data includes “Individual Parts” and “Entire Song.” See below.

Individual Parts

•Notes played

•Voice selection

•[VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340)

•Pedal (Damper/Soft/Sostenuto)

• [REVERB] depth

• [EFFECT] depth

•Dual mode voices

•Dual balance (F3)

•Dual detune (F3)

•Dual octave shift (F3)

• Split mode voices (F4: CLP-370/340)

• Split balance (F4: CLP-370/340)

• Split octave shift (F4: CLP-370/340)

Entire Song

•Tempo

•Time signature (beat)

• [REVERB] type (including OFF)

• [EFFECT] type (including OFF)

Recording Your Performance

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the

beginning of a song)

The initial settings (data recorded at the beginning of a song) can be changed after the recording.

For example, after recording, you can change the voice to create a different ambience or adjust the

song tempo to your taste.

You can change the following initial settings.

Individual Parts

•Voice selection

•[VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340)

• [REVERB] depth

• [EFFECT] depth

•Dual mode voices

• Split mode voices (CLP-370/340)

• Damper/soft pedal depth

Entire Song

•Tempo

• [REVERB] type (including OFF)

• [EFFECT] type (including OFF)

1. Change the settings via the panel controls.

For example, if you wish to change the recorded voice from [E. PIANO 1] to

[E. PIANO 2], press the [E. PIANO 2] button.

2. Engage Record mode and select a part to change the initial settings.

The indicator glows red. (Data shared by two parts can be changed via either part.)

CAUTION

Be careful not to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button or a key on the keyboard, either

of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the selected part.

3. Press the [REC] button to exit Record mode.

Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Handling Songs with a USB Storage

Device

You can handle User songs (save, load, and delete) with a USB storage

device. You can also format the device or media.

Before using a USB device, read the “Precautions when using the USB TO

DEVICE terminal” section on page 41.

About Save and Load

Save

You can save three User songs in the instrument to the USB storage device as SMF song

ﬁles. These songs can be saved to a “container” (or memory location) in the USB stor-

age device. 100 containers are available — S00 – S99.

Since the User songs are saved in SMF format, they can be played back on other instru-

ments, including other Clavinovas.

Load

If you want to only play the song in the USB storage device, the following operation is

not necessary. For instructions on playing the song, see “Playing Back User Songs from

a USB Storage Device” on page 45. The Load operation can be used if you want to edit

the recorded song on the instrument. Data can be loaded to User Song 3 (U03).

NOTE

For details on connecting a USB

storage device, see page 73.

NOTE

Before handling songs with a

USB storage device, make sure

that the device is not protected.

If the device is protected, you

cannot access it.

NOTE

If there is not enough capacity left

on the USB storage device to

save or export the data, an appro-

priate message will appear on the

display and you will not be able to

save or export the data. Delete

unwanted ﬁles from the device to

make more memory available

(page 39), or use another device.

NOTE

The ﬁle numbers which can be

handled in this instrument are 100

ﬁles.

• SMF song numbers: S00 – S99

User song

(Internal memory)

User Song 1 (U01)

User Song 2 (U02)

User Song 3 (U03)

USB storage device

SMF Song 0 (S00)

SMF Song 1 (S01)

SMF Song 2 (S02)

SMF Song 99 (S99)

Memory location

Save

SMF Song 99 (S99)

NOTE

The “S” indication at the top of the

User ﬁle name represents “SMF.”

TERMINOLOGY

SMF (Standard MIDI File):

The SMF (Standard MIDI File)

format is one of the most common

and widely compatible sequence

formats used for storing sequence

data. There are two variations:

Format 0 and Format 1.

A large number of MIDI devices

are compatible with SMF Format 0,

and most commercially available

MIDI sequence data is provided in

SMF Format 0. The SMF format for

sequence ﬁles allows you to

exchange song data between

different sequencers. User songs

recorded on the Clavinova are

SMF Format 0.

User song

(Internal memory)

User Song 1 (U01)

User Song 2 (U02)

User Song 3 (U03)

USB storage device

SMF Song 0 (S00)

SMF Song 1 (S01)

SMF Song 2 (S02)

Memory location

Load

SMF Song 99 (S99)

Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Saving a Song

1. Select a User song to save.

Select a User song to save by using the

[SONG SELECT]

and

[–/NO][+/YES]

buttons.

2. Select a song container in the device and save the

User song.

After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, press

the

[FILE]

button (the “SAVE TO USB” indicator lights). Then, while holding the

[FILE]

button, simultaneously press the

[–/NO][+/YES]

buttons to select a container

(S00 – S99). After releasing the

[FILE]

button, “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display.

Press the

[+/YES]

button to save the songs. The song is saved into the “USER FILES”

folder and named as “USERSONGxx.MID.”

Overwriting the song

If you select a container which contains an SMF song, three dots appear in the

display (ex., “S.0.0.”). If you do not want to overwrite the ﬁle, press the [–/NO]

button when “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display and select another container.

If you want to overwrite the song, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in

the display again to conﬁrm whether you wish to overwrite the ﬁle or not, press

the [+/YES] button once more.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and

Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection:

until the FILE LOAD LED ﬂash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove

the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so

may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

3. Exit from the ﬁle operation mode.

Press the [FILE] button several times to exit the ﬁle operation mode. (The FILE

indicators turn off.)

Play the recorded song (see page 43).

CAUTION

Do not rename User ﬁles on a computer. If the ﬁle name is changed in this way, the ﬁle

cannot be loaded to the instrument.

CLP

370

122 31

Procedure

NOTE

If the selected song has no data,

the song will not be saved (you

cannot select a container for SMF

songs — S00 – S99). Conﬁrm that

the selected song has data by

making sure that the indicator of

[RIGHT] or [LEFT] is turned on.

NOTE

If you move an SMF song from the

“USER FILES” folder to the top

folder using a computer, the ﬁle

type will be changed — from a

SMF song (S00 – S99) to an

External song.

Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Loading a Song

CAUTION

If the User ﬁle (U03) on the instrument already contains data, this operation can result in

overwriting of the data. Make sure to save important data to your computer beforehand.

1. Select a song container in the device.

After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument,

press the

[FILE] button (the “LOAD TO USER.” indicator lights). Then, while

holding the

[FILE] button, press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song

(S00 – S99). Data saved on the instrument can only be loaded back to the

instrument.

2. Load a song to User Song (U03).

“n y” (no/yes) appears in the display. Press the [+/YES] button to load a song.

The ﬁle will automatically be loaded into the User Song (U03).

The indication “-” moves from left to right in display, indicating that save oper-

ation is in process.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and Format

operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until

the LOAD TO USER LED ﬂash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove

the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so

may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

CAUTION

Do not manually change the ﬁle name on the USB storage device by using a computer;

doing so will render the ﬁle unplayable or unable for loading on the instrument.

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power to the instrument while ﬂashing dashes appear in the display

(indicating the operation is in process). Doing so may damage the data.

When loading is completed, the “End” indication appears in the display, and the

song is loaded into the User Song (U03).

3. Exit from the load operation mode.

Press the [FILE] button to exit the load operation mode. (The “FILE” indicators

turn off.)

CLP

370

1 3 1 2

Procedure

Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Deleting Song Files

1. Select a song ﬁle to be deleted.

Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, hold the

[FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a ﬁle to

be deleted. Two types of ﬁles will be displayed in order:

• Sxx....... SMF songs

• xxx....... External songs (commercially available songs or songs which have

been edited on a computer)

2. Delete the ﬁle.

After releasing the [FILE] button, “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display. If you

want to delete the ﬁle, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the dis-

play again to conﬁrm whether you wish to delete the ﬁle or not, press the

[+/YES] button once more.

If you do not want to delete the song, press the [–/NO] button.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and

Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connec-

tion: until the LOAD TO USER LED ﬂash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT

remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices.

Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

3. Exit from the ﬁle operation mode.

Press the [FILE] button to exit the ﬁle operation mode. (The FILE indicators

turn off.)

CLP

370

1 3 1 2

NOTE

Audition the song to be deleted

before deleting. Songs cannot be

played back after engaging the

Delete mode.

Procedure

NOTE

Only ﬁles which contain data will

be displayed.

NOTE

The following types of songs can-

not be deleted. If you try to delete

the song, “Pro” (Protected)

appears in the display.

•Protected songs (extension:

Cxx, Exx or SME)

• Disklavier Piano Soft songs

NOTE

For SMF songs (Sxx), the song

numbers are ﬁxed and not

changed by deleting ﬁles.

However, the song numbers of

External songs are not ﬁxed and

may be changed by deleting

External songs.

Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Formatting the USB Storage Device

CAUTION

If data is already saved to the USB storage device, be careful not to format it.

If you format the device, all the previously saved data will be deleted.

1. Engage the format mode.

Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/ FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, while

holding the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] but-

tons. When “For” (Format) appears in the display, release the [FILE] button to

display “n y” (no/yes).

2. Execute the format operation.

After “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y”

appears in the display again to conﬁrm whether you wish to format the device

or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to format the

device, press the [–/NO] button.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format

operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until

the LOAD TO USER LED ﬂash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove

the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so

may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

3. Exit from the format mode.

Press the [FILE] button to exit the ﬁle operation mode. (The FILE indicators

turn off.)

CLP

370

1 3 1 2

Procedure

ENGLISH

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/

Floppy Disk, etc.)

Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE]

terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB [TO DEVICE] ter-

minal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be

sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the

important precautions below.

Compatible USB devices

USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive,

hard disk drive, etc.)

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please

visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

Connecting USB device

When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE]

terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is

appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.

CAUTION

When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] termi-

nal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover. If

the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB

device may be damaged.

Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device,

you can save data you’ve created to the connected device,

as well as read data from the connected device.

The number of USB storage device to be

used

Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation

(page 40).

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.

Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain

important data.

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each stor-

age device or media. If you are saving data to the USB

storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure

that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the

Save, Copy and Delete operations).

CAUTION

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing

so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or

hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as dur-

ing Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is

mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection),

do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media

from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device.

Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST]

terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST]

terminal, make sure to observe the following points.

Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting

or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument

freezes, restart the application software or the computer

OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.

CAUTION

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] termi-

nal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such

as suspended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the

computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instru-

ment on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from

the USB [TO HOST] terminal.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-

ment. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the key-

board or playing back a song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should

wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1)

when turning the power of the instrument off then on again,

or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB

cable.

NOTE

For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the

owner’s manual of the USB device.

NOTE

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot

be used.

NOTE

Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-

ment, they cannot be used for saving data.

ENGLISH

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy

Disks

An optional ﬂoppy disk drive can be connected to the

USB jack. (CLP-370/340) For instructions on installing

a Yamaha UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive, see page 91.

The ﬂoppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve

created on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk, and allows you

to load data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive

with care. Follow the important precautions below.

Floppy Disk Compatibility

• 3.5” 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward

and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk

slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing

it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject but-

ton pops out.

Removing a Floppy Disk

•After checking that the instrument is not accessing*

the ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the

ﬂoppy disk drive is off), ﬁrmly press the eject button at

the upper right of the disk slot all the way in.

When the ﬂoppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive.

If the ﬂoppy disk cannot be removed because it is

stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the

eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and

attempt to eject it again.

* Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as

recording, playback, or deletion of data.

If a ﬂoppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is

automatically accessed, since the instrument checks

whether the disk has data.

CAUTION

Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument

itself while the disk is being accessed.

Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk

but also damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

•Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/

Write Head

•Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will even-

tually cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head

about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about

the availability of proper head cleaning disks.

About Floppy Disks

Handle ﬂoppy disks with care, and follow these

precautions:

•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy

disks in their protective cases when they are not in use.

•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

•Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as

those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,

since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase

data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached

in the proper location.

To Protect Your Data (Write-pro-

tect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide

the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position

(tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s

write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab

closed).

NOTE

Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive. Other

objects may cause damage to the disk drive or ﬂoppy disks.

Write-protect tab open

(protect position)

Playing Back Songs

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Playing Back Songs

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (pages 30 – 35) or commercially avail-

able songs. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback.

• The Demo Songs ....................................................................................... page 16

Playing the voice demo tune.

• 50 Piano Preset Songs .............................................................................. page 17

50 Piano Preset Songs in the instrument.

• User songs in the instrument .................................................................... page 44

User songs which you recorded to the instrument by using the record function (pages

30 – 35).

• External songs in the instrument .............................................................. page 44

Songs transferred from a computer (including commercially available songs and

songs which have been edited on a computer). Songs can be transferred (saved) to

the instrument by using the Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). The songs are saved to an area of the

internal memory separate from the area for recorded User songs. Up to 255 songs can

be played back on this instrument (numbers 001 – 255).

• User Songs saved from the instrument in the USB storage device.......... page 45

SMF songs which have been saved from the instrument to a USB storage device (page

37).

• External songs in the USB storage device................................................. page 45

Commercially available songs or songs which have been edited on a computer, etc.

and stored to a USB storage device. Up to 999 songs can be played back on this

instrument (numbers 001 – 999).

• Internet songs from the website (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)........... page 46

Connect the instrument to the Internet and play back from the Internet.

Sequence formats that can be played

• SMF (Standard MIDI File) Formats 0 and 1

The SMF format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence for-

mats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format

1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most

commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. The SMF

format for sequence ﬁles allows you to exchange song data between different

sequencers. User songs recorded in this instrument are saved as SMF Format 0.

• ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including

the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

Among ESEQ ﬁles, Disklavier Piano Soft songs can be played back on this instru-

ment.

NOTE

When playing back songs con-

taining various voices or parts

(such as XG or GM songs), the

voices may not sound correct or

as intended on the original. You

may be able to remedy this and

make the playback sound more

natural or appropriate by chang-

ing the Song Channel Selection

setting (page 66) to “1&2,” so that

only channels 1 and 2 will play

back.

NOTE

If the song cannot be selected or

loaded, you may need to change

the Character Code setting (page

70).

NOTE

Song data is not transmitted via

the MIDI connections. However,

channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier

Piano Soft songs and non-pro-

tected External songs will be

transmitted via the MIDI connec-

tions when the Song Channel

Selection is set to “1&2” (page

66).

NOTE

For the USB storage device,

folder directories on this instru-

ment can be recognized up to

two levels. However, the level is

not displayed and song numbers

001 – 999 are displayed which-

ever level the song contains.

NOTE

If the metronome is being used

during playback, the metronome

will automatically stop when play-

back is stopped.

NOTE

If the REVERB type is changed

via the panel controls during play-

back, both the playback and key-

board reverb effects will be

changed.

NOTE

If the EFFECT type is changed via

the panel controls during play-

back, the playback effect may be

switched off in some cases.

Playing Back Songs

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument

1. Select the desired song.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button (the USER indicator lights). Then press the

[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons to select a song. The User songs are displayed as “Uxx*”

and External songs in the instrument are displayed as “xxx.”

*The “U” indication in the User song name means “User.” The letters “xx” represent the song number.

2. Start playback.

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

The current measure number appears on the display during playback.

•You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You

can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by select-

ing a voice from the panel.

Adjust the volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume.

Adjust the tempo

You can use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s

original tempo) is set when you press the

[▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously.

3. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the

top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG

[STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE]

button.

CLP

370

1123

Procedure

NOTE

User song playback cannot be

started when the recorder contains

no data.

NOTE

You can also enjoy playing duets

with yourself by recording one

part of a duet or a song for two

pianos, then playing the other

part while the recorded part plays

back.

NOTE

If you have External songs in the

instrument, you can use the

repeat function.

ALL: Play all External songs in

sequence.

rnd: Play all External songs con-

tinuously in random order.

NOTE

For instructions about how to load

the songs from the computer

(refer on page 76).

Playing Back Songs

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device

1. Select the desired song in the USB storage device.

After making sure that the device is connected to the instrument, press the

[SONG SELECT] button (the USB indicator lights). Then press the [–/NO] [+/

YES]

buttons to select a number of the song you want to play (the number will

appear on the LED display “Sxx*” or “xxx*”), or select the playing method

RND* or ALL*.

*The “S” indication in the display represents “SMF” songs. The letters “xx” represent the song number.

*The “xxx” indication in the display represents External songs.

RND (r n d)*: Play all preset songs continuously in random order.

ALL*: Play all preset songs in sequence.

2. Start and stop playback.

Same as steps 2 and 3 in “Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument”

on page 44.

Useful Playback Functions

Turning part playback on and off

When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for parts that contain data

(one of [RIGHT] [LEFT] or both) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or

stopped, pressing these part buttons turns off the indicators, and the data on those

parts is not played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off.

Starting playback automatically when you start playing the keyboard

(Sync Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the

“Sync Start” function.

To engage the Sync Start function, press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button while hold-

ing down the SONG [STOP] button. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] lamp will ﬂash at the

current tempo.

(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.)

Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard.

This function is useful when you wish to match the timing of the beginning of the play-

back sound and the start of your own performance.

Assigning the PLAY/PAUSE function to the left pedal

The left pedal can also be assigned to song play/pause operation via the “Left Pedal

Mode” (page 66). This is convenient for starting playback of the song anytime after you

have started playing.

CLP

370

112

Procedure

NOTE

Parts can be turned on or off

before or during playback.

TERMINOLOGY

Sync:

Synchronized; occurring at the

same time

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/

340, CLP-S308/S306)

This feature lets you directly connect your instrument to the Internet. A service in the special Yamaha website enables you

to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music.

Here in this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communi-

cations. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the “Glossary of Internet Terms” on page 57.

Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection

You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical ﬁber,

cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For the latest ser-

vices and the speciﬁc instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible

devices etc.), refer to the Yamaha website:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

To use the Internet connection, you will ﬁrst need to subscribe to an Internet service or

provider.

Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem with-

out router)

NOTE

Depending on the Internet con-

nection, you may not be able to

connect to two or more devices

(for example, a computer and the

instrument), depending on the

contract with the provider. This

means you cannot connect with

the instrument. If in doubt, check

your contract or contact your pro-

vider.

NOTE

Connect the LAN cable to the

[LAN] port.

NOTE

Some types of modems require

an optional Ethernet hub network

for simultaneously connecting to

several devices (such as com-

puter, musical instrument, etc.).

NOTE

Due to EU regulations, users

within Europe should use an STP

(shielded twisted pair) cable to

prevent electromagnetic interfer-

ence.

Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument,

since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself.

Modem*

No router capability

Router

Cable type

LAN cable

[LAN] port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with

router)

Connection example 3: Wireless connection (using a wireless game

adaptor)

Connection example 4: Wireless connection (using a USB wireless

LAN adaptor)

NOTE

Connect the LAN cable to the

[LAN] port.

Modem*

Router capability

LAN cable

[LAN] port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

NOTE

Connect the wireless game adap-

tor to the [LAN] port.

NOTE

In addition to the modem or an

access point, this connection

requires a router.

Modem*

Access point

[LAN] port

Wireless Game Adaptor

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

NOTE

Connect the USB wireless LAN

adaptor to the USB [TO DEVICE]

terminal.

NOTE

In addition to the modem or an

access point, this connection

requires a router.

NOTE

This instrument is encrypted in

WEP format only.

Modem* Access point

USB Wireless LAN Adaptor

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet

If you are using a connection by cable (using DHCP):

You do not need to make settings on the instrument. You can access the Internet simply

by connecting a router or a modem equipped with a router to the instrument via a LAN

cable.

Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel

will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG

SELECT]

button.

You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing

back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56.

If you are using a connection by cable (using static IP

address, proxy server):

You need to make Internet settings on the instrument.

For instructions on making Internet settings, see “About the Internet Settings” on page 49.

If you are using a wireless LAN (using a wireless

game adaptor):

You do not need to make settings on the instrument.

You can access the Internet simply by connecting a wireless game adaptor to the instrument.

* The wireless game adaptor requires settings such as the access point. For information about how to make

settings, read the owner’s manual for the product you are using.

Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel

will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG

SELECT]

button.

You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing

back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56.

If you are using a wireless LAN (using a USB wireless

LAN adaptor):

You need to make Internet settings from a computer; settings cannot be made on the

instrument.

For instructions on making Internet settings, see “About the Internet Settings” on page 49.

NOTE

The most common routers and

modems equipped with a router

have a DHCP function.

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

About the Internet Settings

You can conveniently make Internet settings for your instrument from the special

Yamaha website.

If you select a wireless connection using the USB wireless LAN adaptor or a connection

by cable (using static IP address or proxy server), you need to make Internet settings

explained as follows.

Internet Settings

When you use the Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the ﬁrst time, you should

make the Internet settings according to the following illustration ﬂow.

This ﬂow is shown to make you easily understand how to load the setting ﬁle created by

the computer to your instrument. By following this ﬂow, you won’t need to make

difﬁcult settings such as typing various data on your instrument.

For details, refer to the Yamaha webpage:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

Creating the Internet Setting Files

You need to create the Internet setting ﬁles on the special Yamaha webpage using your

computer before making the Internet settings.

For information about how to create the Internet setting ﬁles, read the instructions on

the Yamaha webpage:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

Loading the Internet Setting Files

This procedure lets you make Internet settings by loading the Internet setting ﬁles

created on the special Yamaha webpage to the instrument.

1. Engage the Function mode.

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory device containing the saved Internet

setting ﬁle named “conﬁg.n21” is connected to the instrument, and then press

the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the [FUNCTION] indicator lights.

NOTE

You do not need to make the

Internet settings here if you are

using a connection by cable

(using DHCP) or a wireless LAN

(using a wireless game adaptor).

Create the Internet

setting ﬁle

Save the ﬁle

to USB ﬂash

memory

USB Flash

Memory

Load the ﬁle to

the instrument

Access the

special Yamaha

website

NOTE

The Internet settings will be

backed up.

CLP

370

125 4

NOTE

You can create the Internet

setting ﬁles (named “conﬁg.n21”)

on the special Yamaha webpage.

NOTE

The Load mode cannot be

engaged while voice demo song

playback is in use, when the

[REC] button is on, or when user

song playback is active.

Procedure

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

2. Select Function F9.y (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.y

(on the CLP-S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.y (CLP-370/

340) or F8.y (CLP-S308/S306).

3. Enter the Sub-modes Selection mode following the

F9 or F8.

Press the [+/YES] button to enter the Sub-modes Selection mode.

4. Select Function F9.1 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.1

(on the CLP-S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.1 (CLP-370/

340) or F8.1 (CLP-S308/S306).

If you do not want to load the ﬁle, press the [–/NO] button.

5. Start loading.

Press the [+/YES] button.

After “n-y” appears in the display again to conﬁrm whether you wish to load the

ﬁle or not, press the [+/YES] button once more.

If you do not want to load the ﬁle, press the [–/NO] button.

When loading from the USB ﬂash memory device is

completed, an “End” message will appear on the dis-

play. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this

display.

Once loading is completed, you are now ready to access the Internet.

Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected

channel will be shown on the display when you select “INTERNET” lamp with

the [SONG SELECT] button.

For instructions on listening to the songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Inter-

net” on page 56.

NOTE

If loading is not successfully com-

pleted, an “Err” message and the

error code will appear alternately

on the display.

To return to the previous indica-

tion, press the [–/NO] or

[+/YES] button.

NOTE

Error Code

You can check the description for

the error code on the Yamaha

website:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

NOTE

Yamaha recommends that you

back up the Internet setting ﬁles

(page 78).

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Checking the ﬁeld strength (when using a USB wireless

LAN adaptor)

You can check the ﬁeld strength on the display, if you are using a USB wireless LAN

adaptor (Connection example 4 on page 47).

Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-

modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).

1. Select Function F9.3 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.3

(on the CLP-S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.3 (CLP-370/

340) or F8.3 (CLP-S308/S306).

2. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button

The ﬁeld strength indication will appear on the display for about three seconds.

Field Strength Indications

NOTE

The ﬁeld strength can be dis-

played after making the Internet

connection.

NOTE

If you are using a wireless game

adaptor, the display pattern for

“No wireless LAN is used” will

appear.

Procedure

Radio Status Display

No signal is present.

Field strength: Weak

Field strength: Medium

Field strength: Strong

No wireless LAN is used.

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Exporting the Connection Information

This procedure lets you export the detailed information on the current connection as a

text ﬁle to a USB ﬂash memory device. You can check the information on your com-

puter.

Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-

modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).

1. Select Function F9.2 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.2

(on the CLP-S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.2 (CLP-370/

340) or F8.2 (CLP-S308/S306).

2. Turn on the Export mode.

Press the [+/YES] buttons so that “OUt” appears on the display.

If you do not want to export the ﬁle, press the [–/NO]

button.

3. Start exporting.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A “n y” appears in the display to conﬁrm whether you wish to export the ﬁle or

not, press the [+/YES] button again.

If you do not want to export the ﬁle, press the [–/NO] button.

A “n

–

y” message will appear on the display if a USB ﬂash memory device con-

tains a ﬁle with the same name as the one you are attempting to export.

Press the [+/YES] button to execute the overwriting operation. Press the [–/NO]

button to cancel exporting.

When exporting to the USB ﬂash memory device is

completed, an “End” message will appear on the dis-

play. Press

[–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this

display.

After exporting, connect the USB ﬂash memory device to your computer, and

then open the text ﬁle named “ConnectionInfo.txt” in the root directory of the

USB ﬂash memory device to check the detailed connection information.

NOTE

The connection information ﬁle

does not allow you to manually

make Internet settings. The con-

nection information ﬁle is set to

“read only” and cannot be edited.

Procedure

NOTE

The export mode cannot be

engaged while voice demo song

playback is in use, when the

[REC] button is on, or when user

song playback is active.

NOTE

If exporting has not successfully

been completed, an “Err” mes-

sage and the error code will

appear alternately on the display.

NOTE

Error Code

You can check the description for

the error code on the Yamaha

website:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Other Internet Operations

Checking the version number of the instrument

You can check the version number of this instrument.

Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-

modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).

1. Select Function [F9.4] (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.4 (on the CLP-

S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.4 (CLP-

370/340) or F8.4 (CLP-S308/S306).

2. Call up the version number.

Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display.

A “PrG” message and version number “x.xx” will appear alternately on the

display.

3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode

Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the sub-modes.

4. Exit from the Function mode

Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from function modes.

Checking the version number of the LAN Port driver

You can check the version number of the LAN Port driver.

Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-

modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).

1. Select Function F9.5 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.5 (on the CLP-

S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.5 (CLP-

370/340) or F8.5 (CLP-S308/S306).

2. Call up the version number.

Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display.

A “L-P” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the

display.

3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode

Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes.

4. Exit from function mode

Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes.

Procedure

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Checking the version number of the USB-LAN

Adapter driver

You can check the version number of the USB-LAN Adapter driver.

Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-

modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).

1. Select Function F9.6 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.6 (on the CLP-

S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.6 (CLP-

370/340) or F8.6 (CLP-S308/S306).

2. Call up the version number.

Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display.

A “L-A” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the

display.

3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode

Press the

[+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes.

4. Exit from function mode

Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes.

Procedure

Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Initializing Internet Settings

You can initialize the Internet settings.

Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-

modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).

1. Select Function F9.7 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.7 (on the CLP-

S308/S306).

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.7 (CLP-

370/340) or F8.7 (CLP-S308/S306).

2. Enter the Initializing mode.

Press the [+/YES] buttons.

A “CLr” message will appear on the display.

3. Conﬁrm the initialization.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A “n y” appears in the display to conﬁrm whether you wish to initialize or

not.

If you do not want to initialize, press the [–/NO] button.

4. Execute the initialization.

Press again the [+/YES] buttons.

Start the initialization.

When initialization is completed, an “End” message appears on the display.

5. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode

Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes.

6. Exit from function mode

Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes.

CAUTION

Initializing restores the instrument to the factory-programmed settings for all Internet

settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the Internet settings before initial-

izing.

Internet Initial Settings List

The following are the default settings of this instrument.

NOTE

The settings of the Internet are not

initialized when using the “Initial-

izing the data” on page 58.

Procedure

NOTE

Information of the cookies will be

initialized at the same time.

DHCP ON (available)

Wireless LAN OFF (no settings)

Proxy server OFF (no settings)

Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-

370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

Yamaha provides a special website with data service that enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various

musical genres as background music on your instrument.

Before connect the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read “Internet Direct Connection” on page 46.

1. Turn on the “INTERNET” lamp.

Make sure that the instrument is connected to the Internet, then press the

[SONG SELECT] button (the INTERNET indicator lights). The “INTERNET”

access lamp ﬂashes in red during Internet access.

2. Change the Channel.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to change the channel. The current channel

setting appears on the display.

3. Start playback.

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback (the “INTERNET”

access lamp ﬂashes in red during Internet access).

4. Stop playback.

Press the SONG [STOP] button.

CLP

370

134

Procedure

NOTE

You cannot select the “INTER-

NET” lamp while voice demo

song playback is in use or the

[REC] button is on.

NOTE

The LED displays shown in this

owner’s manual are for instruc-

tional purposes only and may

appear somewhat different from

those on your instrument.

NOTE

You can adjust the Effect Type

(page 23) that is applied to the

voice you play on the keyboard

as well as for the song on Internet

playback. The Touch sensitivity

(page 24) for the keyboard voice

can also be adjusted to your lik-

ing. You can also change the Bril-

liance type (page 22) and Reverb

type (page 22) that are applied to

Internet song playback.

NOTE

When you select a different song

(or a different song is selected

during chained playback), an

appropriate Reverb Type will be

selected accordingly.

NOTE

Song data from the Internet is not

transmitted via the MIDI connec-

tors.

NOTE

The Synchro start function, Part

settings and A-B Repeat function

becomes effective after you play

back the song once.

Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Glossary of Internet Terms

Access point

A device that acts as a communication hub for multiple wireless devices, and conventionally enables both

wired and wireless LAN connections.

Broadband

An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical ﬁber) that allows for high-speed, high-

volume data communication.

Browser

The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display

that shows the contents of the web pages.

A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Inter-

net. The function is similar to a preference ﬁle in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” cer-

tain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each

time you visit the site.

DHCP

This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network conﬁguration information

can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.

Download

Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other

local storage device—much like copying ﬁles from your hard disk drive to a ﬂoppy disk. For this instrument,

this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.

Home page

The ﬁrst page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to

mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.

Internet

A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile

phones and other devices.

IP address

A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location

on the network.

LAN

Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single

location (such as an ofﬁce or home) by means of a special cable.

Link

Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a

web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link.

Modem

A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It

converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa.

Provider

A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is

necessary to contract to a provider.

Proxy

A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing informa-

tion on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulﬁll the requests

itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and

speed, and to ﬁlter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network.

Router

A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting

several computers in a house or ofﬁce, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is

usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.

Server

A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to ﬁles and services.

Site

Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection

of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site.

SSL

Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting conﬁdential data such as credit card numbers over

the Internet.

URL

Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to speciﬁc websites and

pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”

Web page

Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.

WEP

Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, a security protocol for wireless networks. WEP protects communication

contents from being intercepted.

Wireless LAN

A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.

Wireless Game

Adaptor (Wireless

Ethernet Converter

or Bridge)

Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game

machines, etc. equipped with

[LAN] ports.

Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Initializing the data

CAUTION

When you initialize the data, all panel settings and song data will be erased and reset to

the default settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the data before initial-

izing (refer on page 78).

Turn off the power to the instrument. Then turn the power on

while holding the C7 key (highest key).

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power to this instrument while data in internal memory is being ini-

tialized (in other words, while the “CLr” indication is shown). Doing so may corrupt the

all data on the instrument.

Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as ﬁne tuning the pitch or selecting a

scale, etc.

The following parameters are available.

The CLP-370/340 has nine main functions, and the CLP-330 has seven main functions, and the CLP-S308/S306 has eight

main functions.

Some of these main functions consist of a set of sub-modes.

Parameter List

Function Sub-Mode

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330

CLP-S308/

S306

Reference

page

Fine tuning of the pitch

—F1F1F162

Selecting a scale

Scale F2.1 F2.1 F2.1 63

Base Note F2.2 F2.2 F2.2 63

Dual mode functions

Dual Balance F3.1 F3.1 F3.1 64

Dual Detune F3.2 F3.2 F3.2 64

Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.3 F3.3 F3.3 64

Voice 2 Octave Shift F3.4 F3.4 F3.4 64

Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.5 F3.5 F3.5 64

Voice 2 Effect Depth F3.6 F3.6 F3.6 64

Reset F3.7 F3.7 F3.7 64

Split mode functions

Split Point F4.1 — — 65

Split Balance F4.2 — — 65

Right Voice Octave Shift F4.3 — — 65

Left Voice Octave Shift F4.4 — — 65

Right Voice Effect Depth F4.5 — — 65

Left Voice Effect Depth F4.6 — — 65

Damper Pedal Range F4.7 — — 65

Reset F4.8 — — 65

Other Functions

Left Pedal Mode F5.1 F4.1 F4.1 66

Soft Pedal Effect Depth F5.2 F4.2 F4.2 66

Sustain Sample Depth F5.3 — — 66

Keyoff Sample Volume F5.4 — — 66

Song Channel Selection F5.5 F4.3 F4.3 66

Metronome volume

— F6 F5 F5 67

MIDI Functions

MIDI Transmit Channel Selection F7.1 F6.1 F6.1 67

MIDI Receive Channel Selection F7.2 F6.2 F6.2 68

Local Control ON/OFF F7.3 F6.3 F6.3 68

Program Change ON/OFF F7.4 F6.4 F6.4 68

Control Change ON/OFF F7.5 F6.5 F6.5 68

Panel/Status Transmit F7.6 F6.6 F6.6 69

Initial Setup Send F7.7 F6.7 F6.7 69

Backup Functions

Voice F8.1 F7.1 F7.1 70

MIDI F8.2 F7.2 F7.2 70

Tuning F8.3 F7.3 F7.3 70

Others F8.4 F7.4 F7.4 70

Character Code

— F8.5 F7.5 F7.5 70

Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Basic Procedure in Function Mode

Follow the steps below to use the functions.

(If you become lost while using a function, return to this page and read the basic procedure.)

1. Engage the Function mode.

Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its [FUNCTION] indicator lights.

will appear on the display. (The indication of “ ” varies depending on

the status of the unit and usage.)

2. Select a function.

Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired function from

F1 – F9 (CLP-370/340), F1 – F7 (CLP-330), F1 – F8 (CLP-S308/S306).

3. Use the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons.

If the function does not include sub-modes, jump to Step 4.

If the function includes sub-modes, press the [+/YES] button once to enter the

respective sub-mode.

LAN Settings

Loading Internet Setting File F9.1 — F8.1 49

Exporting The Connection Informa-

tion

F9.2 — F8.2 52

Checking the Field Strength F9.3 — F8.3 51

Program Version

Program Version F9.4 — F8.4 53

LAN Functions

LAN port driver version F9.5 — F8.5 53

USB-LAN Adapter version F9.6 — F8.6 54

Initializing Internet Settings F9.7 — F8.7 55

Function Sub-Mode

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330

CLP-S308/

S306

Reference

page

CLP

370

3 4

1245

Procedure

NOTE

Functions cannot be selected

during Demo/Song Select/ ﬁle

operation mode or when the user

song recorder is in operation.

NOTE

To exit the Function mode, press

[FUNCTION] button any time.

NOTE

After you select the function, the

current setting will be displayed

when the [–/NO] or [+/YES] but-

ton is pressed for the ﬁrst time.

Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

4. Operate the desired function using the following

two buttons.

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲]

Selects the desired function/sub-mode.

[–/NO] or [+/YES]

After you select the desired function or sub-mode, set the ON/OFF, select the

type, or change the value, accordingly.

Depending on the setting, the default setting (which is used when you ﬁrst turn

on the power to the Clavinova) is recalled by pressing the [–/NO] and [+/YES]

buttons simultaneously.

Operation Example 1 (F1. Fine tuning of the pitch)

Operation Example 2 (F3.1 “Dual Balance”)

After using the function, exit the function mode.

To exit the Function mode, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its

[TEMPO] indicator lights.

Engage the Function mode.

LED indication

Change the value.

LED indication

Select a desired function.

Engage the Function mode. Select a desired function.

LED indication

Engage the respective

sub-mode.

Select a desired sub-mode.

LED indication

Change the value.

LED indication

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

About Each Function

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instrument.

This function is useful when you play the Clavinova

along with other instruments or CD music.

1. Engage the Function mode and select .

2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or

raise the pitch of the A3 key in approximately

0.2 Hz increments.

The value appears two-digit number and one decimal

place.

Ex. 440.2Hz is shown as 40.2 on the display.

F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch

Display Value

440.0

Setting range:

440.2

427.0 – 453.0 (Hz)

440.4

Normal setting:

440.6

440.0 (Hz)

440.8

TERMINOLOGY

Hz (Hertz):

This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and

represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second.

NOTE

You can also use the keyboard to set the pitch (in any mode

other than Function mode).

To tune up (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0

keys (three white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press

any key between C3 and B3.

To tune down (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and

C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and

press any key between C3 and B3.

To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1,B -1, C0 and C#0

(three white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press any

key between C3 and B3.

Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest (farthest left)

key on the keyboard corresponds to A -1, and the highest

(farthest right) key to C7.

During the procedure described above, the display indicates a

value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display

returns to the previous indication.

NOTE

You can also tune in about 1Hz steps (in any mode other

than Function mode).

To tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz

increments:

Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at

the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a

black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button.

To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys

(three white keys at the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two

white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO]

[+/YES] buttons simultaneously.

During the procedure described above, the display indicates a

value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display

returns to the previous indication.

A -1

A#-1

B -1

C#0

C3 B3

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common

contemporary piano tuning scale. However,

history has known numerous other scales,

many of which serve as the basis for certain

genres of music. You can experience these

tunings with

the Clavinova.

Equal Temperament

One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals.

Currently the most popular piano tuning scale.

Pure Major/Pure Minor

Based on natural overtones, three major chords using

these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound.

Pythagorean

This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher,

is based on the interval of a perfect 5th.

The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beauti-

ful and suitable for some leads.

Mean Tone

This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that

the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. The scale

became popular during the late 16th century through the

late 18th century, and was used by Handel.

Werckmeister/Kirnberger

These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in

different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the

impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in

the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are often used today

to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords.

1. Engage the Function mode and select .

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale

function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the

desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select

the number of the desired tuning.

Sub-mode

F2.1: Scale

Setting range: 1: Equal Temperament

2: Pure Major

3: Pure Minor

4: Pythagorean

5: Mean Tone

6: Werckmeister

7: Kirnberger

Normal setting: 1: Equal Temperament

F2.2: Base Note

If you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, you

need to specify the root. (You can specify the root note

with Equal Temperament selected, but it is not effective.

The base note setting is effective for tunings other than

the Equal Temperament tuning.)

Setting range:

Normal setting:

•Root indication example

F2. Selecting a Scale



) (G) (A



)

followed by

a high bar if sharp

followed by

a low bar if ﬂat

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

You can set various parameters for Dual mode

to optimize the settings for the songs you play,

such as adjusting the volume balance between

two voices.

Dual mode function settings are set individu-

ally for each voice combination.

1. Select the voices in Dual mode, then engage

the Function mode and select .

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Dual

mode function’s sub-mode, then use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select

the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/

YES] button to assign values.

Sub-mode

F3.1: Dual Balance

Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an

equal balance between the two Dual

mode voices. Settings below “10”

increase the volume of Voice 2 in

relation to Voice 1, and settings

above “10” increase the volume of

Vo ic e 1 in relation to Voice 2.)

Normal setting:

Different for each voice combination.

You can set one voice as the main voice, and another

voice as a softer, mixed voice.

F3.2: Dual Detune

Setting range: -20 – 0 – 20 (With positive values,

the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the

pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With neg-

ative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is

lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is

raised.)

Normal setting:

Different for each voice combination.

Detune Voice 1 and Voice 2 for Dual mode to create a

thicker sound.

F3.3: Voice 1 Octave Shift

F3.4: Voice 2 Octave Shift

Setting range: –1, 0, 1

Normal setting:

Different for each voice combination.

You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for

Vo ice 1 and Voice 2 independently. Depending on which

voices you combine in Dual mode, the combination may

sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an

octave.

F3.5: Voice 1 Effect Depth

F3.6: Voice 2 Effect Depth

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting:

Different for each voice combination.

These functions make it possible to individually set the

depth of the effect for Voices 1 and 2 for Dual mode.

(The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the

[EFFECT] is ON. Function mode must be exited before

the [EFFECT] can be turned ON.)

•“Vo ice 1” and “Voice 2” are explained on page 26.

F3.7: Reset

This function resets all Dual mode functions to their

default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values.

F3. Dual Mode Functions

NOTE

If Dual mode is not engaged, will appear instead of

and you will be unable to select Dual mode functions.

In this case, you can switch to the Dual mode by selecting two

voices.

NOTE

The available setting range is wider in the lower range (± 60 cents

for A -1), and narrower in the higher range (± 5 cents for C7). (100

cents equal one semitone.)

NOTE

SHORTCUT:

You can jump directly to the Dual mode functions by pressing

the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the two Dual mode

voice buttons.

To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION]

button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

This menu enables you to make various

detailed settings for Split mode.

By changing the split point or other setting,

you can optimize the settings for the songs

you play.

1. Select the voices in Split mode, then engage

the Function mode and select .

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Split

mode function’s sub-mode, then use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select

the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/

YES] button to assign values.

Sub-mode

F4.1: Split Point

Setting range: The entire keyboard

Normal setting: F



Set the point on the keyboard that separates the right and

left-hand sections (split point). The pressed key is

included in the left-hand range.

•Instead of pressing the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons, you

can engage the split point by pressing the appropriate

key on the keyboard.

•If Function mode is not engaged, you can change the

split point to any other key by pressing the key while

holding the [SPLIT] button (page 27).

•An example of a key name indication for a split point

F4.2: Split Balance

Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an

equal balance between the two Split

mode voices. Settings below “10”

increase the volume of the left voice

in relation to the right voice, and set-

tings above “10” increase the volume

of the right voice in relation to the

left voice.)

Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-

tion.

The volume level of the two voices combined in Split

mode can be adjusted as required. You can make this

setting for each combination of voices individually.

F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift

F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift

Setting range: –1, 0, 1

Normal setting: Different for each voice combination

You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for

the Right Voice and Left Voice independently. Make a

setting depending on the note range of the songs you

play. You can make this setting for each combination of

voices individually.

F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth

F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: Different for each voice combination

These functions make it possible to individually set the

depth of the effect for the left and right Split mode

voices.

The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the

[EFFECT] is ON. You must exit Function mode before

you can turn on an [EFFECT].

You can make this setting for each combination of voices

individually.

F4.7: Damper Pedal Range

Setting range: ALL (for both voices)

1 (for the right Voice)

2 (for the left Voice)

Normal setting: ALL

The Damper Pedal Range function determines whether

the damper pedal affects the right voice, the left voice, or

both the left and right voices in Split mode.

F4.8: Reset

This function resets all Split mode functions to their

default values. Press the

[+/YES] button to reset the val-

ues.

F4. (CLP-370/340)

Split Mode Functions

NOTE

If Split mode is not engaged, will appear instead of

and you will be unable to select Split mode functions. Also note

that you must exit Function mode before you can engage Split

mode.



2) (G2)

followed by

a high bar if sharp

followed by

a low bar if ﬂat

NOTE

SHORTCUT:

You can jump directly to Split mode functions by pressing the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the [SPLIT] button.

To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNC-

TION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

This section provides a variety of other functions,

including letting you assign the operation of the

left pedal to one of several modes, and allowing

you to select speciﬁc song channels for playback.

1. Engage the Function mode and select

(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-

330).

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the other

functions’ sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired

sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to select

the desired pedal function or assign the values.

Sub-mode

F5.1

(CLP-370/340)/F4.1 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Left Pedal Mode

Setting range:

1. Soft Pedal

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly

changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is

pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are

already playing.

2. Song Play/Pause

This mode allows you to start or pause song playback.

In this mode, the Left Pedal functions in the same

manner as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the

panel.

3. Variation (CLP-370/340)

This mode enables you to switch the Voice’s variation

on or off. In this mode, the left pedal functions in the

same manner as the [VARIATION] button on the

panel.

Normal setting: 1 (Soft Pedal)

F5.2 (CLP-370/340)/F4.2 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Soft Pedal Effect Depth

Setting range: 1 – 5

Normal setting: 3

This function sets the depth of the soft pedal effect.

F5.3

(CLP-370/340)

Sustain Sample Depth

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: 12

The GRAND PIANO 1

voice features special “Sustain

Samples” that recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic

grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the

damper

pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of

this effect.

F5.4 (CLP-370/340)

Keyoff Sample Volume

Setting range: 0 – 20

Normal setting: 10

You can adjust the volume of the keyoff sound (the sub-

tle sound produced when the keys are released) for voices

[GRAND PIANO1], [HARPSICHORD], [E.CLAVICHORD]

(including their variations).

F5.5 (CLP-370/340)/F4.3 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Song Channel Selection

Setting range: ALL, 1&2

Normal setting: ALL

The setting here only affects Disklavier Piano Soft songs,

and non-protected External songs. You can specify which

song channels will play back on this instrument. When

“ALL” is selected, channels 1 – 16 will be played back.

When “1&2” is selected, only channels 1 and 2 will be

played back, while channels 3 – 16 will be transmitted via

MIDI.

F5.

(CLP-370/340)

/ F4.

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Other Functions

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

You can change the volume of the metronome

sound.

Use this function to adjust the metronome vol-

ume.

1. Engage the Function mode and select

(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-

330).

2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the

metronome volume as required.

Setting range: 1 – 20

Normal setting: 10

You can make detailed adjustments to MIDI

settings.

For more information about MIDI, see the

“About MIDI” section (page 72).

1. Engage the Function mode and select

(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-

330).

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI

function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the

desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to set a

selected parameter.

Sub-mode

F7.1:

(CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

MIDI Transmit Channel Selection

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the

transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched

for proper data transfer.

This parameter enables you to specify the channel on

which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

Setting range: 1 – 16, OFF (not transmitted)

Normal setting: 1

F6.

(CLP-370/340)

/ F5.

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Metronome Volume

NOTE

SHORTCUT:

You can jump directly to the metronome functions (CLP-370/

340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) by pressing the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION] button while holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

To exit the Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/

FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.

F7.

(CLP-370/340)

/ F6.

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

MIDI Functions

All MIDI settings described below will affect the MIDI signal

in and out of the USB [TO HOST] connector.

NOTE

In Dual mode, Voice 1 data is transmitted on its speciﬁed channel.

In Split mode (CLP-370/340), right voice data is transmitted on its

speciﬁed channel. In Dual mode, Voice 2 data is transmitted on the

next greater channel number relative to the speciﬁed channel. In

Split mode (CLP-370/340), left voice data is transmitted on the next

greater channel number relative to the speciﬁed channel. In either

mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF.”

NOTE

Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connections. However,

channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier Piano Soft songs, and non-protected

External songs will be transmitted via the MIDI connections depend-

ing on the Song Channel Selection setting (page 66).

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

F7.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

MIDI Receive Channel Selection

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the

transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched

for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to

specify the channel on which the Clavinova receives

MIDI data.

Setting range: ALL, 1&2, 1 – 16

Normal setting: ALL

F7.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Local Control ON/OFF

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the key-

board controls its internal tone generator, allowing the

internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard.

This situation is “Local Control On,” since the internal

tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard.

Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the

keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the

appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the

MIDI OUT terminal when notes are played on the key-

board. At the same time, the internal tone generator

responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN

terminal.

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: ON

F7.4: (CLP-370/340)/F7.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Program Change ON/OFF

Normally the instrument will respond to MIDI program

change numbers received from an external keyboard or

other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly-num-

bered voice to be selected on the corresponding channel

(the keyboard voice does not change). The instrument

will normally also send a MIDI program change number

whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the corre-

spondingly-numbered voice or program to be selected

on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to

receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers.

This function makes it possible to cancel program

change number reception and transmission so that

voices can be selected on the instrument without affect-

ing the external MIDI device.

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: ON

F7.5: (CLP-370/340)/F7.5: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Control Change ON/OFF

Normally the CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will

respond to MIDI control change data received from an

external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on

the corresponding channel to be affected by pedal and

other “control” settings received from the controlling

device (the keyboard voice is not affected).

The CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 also transmits

MIDI control change information when the pedal or

other appropriate controls are operated.

This function makes it possible to cancel control change

data reception and transmission so that, for example, the

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306’s pedal and other

controls can be operated without affecting an external

MIDI device.

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: ON

NOTE

ALL:

“Multi-timbre” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception of

different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, enabling the Clavinova to

play multi-channel song data received from F7.6 (CLP-370/340)/

F6.6 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) or sequencer.

1&2:

“1&2” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception on chan-

nels 1 and 2 only, enabling the Clavinova to play 1 and 2 channel

song data received from a music computer or sequencer.

NOTE

Program change and other like channel messages received will not

affect the instrument’s panel settings or the notes you play on the

keyboard.

NOTE

No MIDI reception occurs when Demo mode is engaged or during

ﬁle operations.

NOTE

For information on program change numbers for each of the Instru-

ment’s voices, Refer to MIDI Data Format on the web site.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

NOTE

For information on control changes that can be used with the CLP-

370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306, refer to the MIDI Data Format in our

manual library at the following website.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

F7.6:

(CLP-370/340)/

F7.6:

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Panel/Status Transmit

This function causes all the current instrument panel set-

tings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI

OUT terminal.

Procedure

1. Set up the panel controls as desired.

2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and

set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data.

3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-

370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330).

4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status

data.

will appear on the LED display when the data has

been successfully transmitted.

F7.7:

(CLP-370/340)/

F7.7:

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Initial Setup Send

This function lets you send the data of the panel settings

to a computer. By transmitting the panel settings and

recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to

the actual performance data, the instrument will be

automatically restored to the same settings when the per-

formance is played back. You can also use this function to

change the settings of a connected tone generator to the

same settings as the instrument.

Procedure

1. Set up the panel controls as desired.

2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and

set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data.

3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-

370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330).

4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status

data.

will appear on the LED display when the data has

been successfully transmitted.

The following data can be sent.

•Voice selection

• [REVERB] type

• [REVERB] depth

• [EFFECT] type

• [EFFECT] depth

• Split point

•Tuning (F1)

•Dual detune (F3.2)

TERMINOLOGY

Setup Data:

Data that contains a set of panel settings for the Clavinova.

NOTE

For a list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmitted by this function,

refer to our manual library at the following website.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

NOTE

Receiving the transmitted data:

1. Connect the Clavinova via MIDI to the device to which the setup

data was transmitted previously.

2. Start sending the setup data from the device.

The Clavinova automatically receives the setup data, which will be

reﬂected in the panel settings.

(For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the setup

data should be the same model as the one that transmitted the

setup data to the sequencer.)

NOTE

For more information on transmitting and receiving setup data via

MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI device.

Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

However, the backup settings themselves, the contents of

the user song recorder memory, character code settings

and internet settings are always backed up.

You can turn the backup function on or off for

each function group (each of the following

sub-mode functions).

1. Engage the Function mode and select

(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-

330).

2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the

backup function’s sub-mode, then use the

[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select

the desired sub-mode.

Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to turn the

backup function on or off.

Sub-mode

F9.1:

(CLP-370/340)/F8.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Voice

F9.2:

(CLP-370/340)/F8.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

MIDI

F9.3:

(CLP-370/340)/F8.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Tuning

F9.4:

(CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Others

Setting range: ON/OFF

Normal setting: Vo i ce: OFF

MIDI – Others: ON

Description of sub-modes

F9.1:

(CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Voice

•Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split <CLP-370/340>)

•Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each

voice combination)

• Split (CLP-370/340) (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Func-

tions for each voice combination)

•Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)

• Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)

•Variation (CLP-370/340) (for each voice)

•Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume)

•Metronome (Beat, Volume < (CLP-370/340)/

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) settings>)

F9.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

MIDI

The MIDI functions ( <CLP-370/340>/

<CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings)

(expect for the F7.6 and F7.7 <CLP-370/340>/

and <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330>)

F9.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Tuning

•Transpose

•Tuning ( settings)

• Scale (including base note) ( settings)

F9.4: (CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Others

•Other functions ( <CLP-370/340>/

<CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings)

• BRILLIANCE setting

•DAMPER RES. ON/OFF and Depth

If the song cannot be loaded, you may need to change the

character code setting.

Setting range: Int (English)/JA (Japanese)

Normal setting: Int

For details on how to set the LAN, see on pages 46 – 53, 58.

F8.

(CLP-370/340)

/ F7.

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Backup Functions

TERMINOLOGY

Backup:

You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and reverb

type, so that they will not be lost when you turn off the power to the

Clavinova.

If the backup function is turned on, the settings at power off are

effective. If the backup function is turned off, the settings in memory

are erased when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn

on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial settings) will

be used. (The factory setting default list is found on page 98.)

F8.5

(CLP-370/340)

/ F7.5

(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)

Character Code

(CLP-370/340)/ F8

(CLP-S308/S306)

LAN Settings

Connections

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Connections

Connectors

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turn-

ing the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to

the components may result.

1 AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks

You can connect these jacks to a Keyboard ampliﬁer system to monitor your play-

ing. Refer to the diagram below and use cables to make the connections. The Mas-

ter volume affects the AUX OUT signal. If you want to turn off the sound of the

internal speakers, use the speaker switch (page 15).

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, ﬁrst turn on the

power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

The sound via the internal speakers and headphones is set to the proper condition automatically (see below).

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

MIDI

OUT

THRU

AUX IN

L/L+R

AUX OUT

CLP-370/340/330

CLP-370/340 only

Show the jacks as seen when

viewed from below the instrument.

CLP-370/340 only

On the left of the panel

CLP-S308/S306

21 6

RightLeft

NOTE

Use cables and plugs with no

resistance.

NOTE

Do not input the sound from the

AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN

jacks. This may cause a feedback

loop, and the output sound may

be excessively loud.

NOTE

If you want to take a mono signal

via the AUX OUT jack, connect a

cable to the [L/L+R] jack.

L/L+R

AUX OUT

Clavinova Keyboard ampliﬁer

AUX IN

Phone plug Phone plug

Cable

Speakers sound

Speakers do not sound

No plugs to connected to AUX OUT jacks Plugs connected to AUX OUT jacks

Speakers On Speakers Normal

(Headphones Switch)

Speakers Off Speakers On Speakers Normal

(Headphones Switch)

Speakers Off

Headphones

connected

Optimum equalization for

speakers applied

Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat

Headphones

not connected

Optimum equalization for

speakers applied

Optimum equalization for

speakers applied

Flat Flat Flat Flat

Connections

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

2 AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,

allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s

speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connec-

tions.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst turn on the power to

the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

3 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices.

Refer to “Connection to a USB storage device” on page 73.

4 USB [TO HOST] terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connect-

ing a Personal Computer” on page 75 for more information.

5 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is.

6 [LAN] terminal (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)

Connect to the internet (see page 46).

NOTE

The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOL-

UME] slider setting affect the

input signal from the AUX IN

jacks, but the [BRILLIANCE],

[REVERB], and [EFFECT] set-

tings do not.

NOTE

If you connect the Clavinova to a

monaural device, use only the

AUX IN [L/L+R] jack.

AUX IN

L/L+R

Clavinova

OUTPUT

Tone Generator

Plug shape depends on

the device.

LINE OUT

Tone Generator

AUX IN

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

AUX IN

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

Phone plug

(standard)

NOTE

There are two different types of

USB terminals on the instrument:

USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO

HOST]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corre-

sponding cable connectors. Be

careful to connect the proper plug

in the proper direction.

NOTE

MIDI performance data and com-

mands are transferred in the form

of numeric values.

NOTE

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received varies

depending on the type of MIDI

device, check the “MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart” to ﬁnd out what

MIDI data and commands your

devices can transmit or receive.

Refer to the MIDI Implementation

Chart in the Data Format on the

website.

For information on how to access

and obtain the Data Format list,

see page 3.

Direct URL:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/

reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices

and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the

Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer.

Connections

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Connection to a USB storage device

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data

you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.

Compatible USB storage devices

A USB storage device, such as a ﬂoppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, ﬂash

memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Other

USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnect-

ing the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or

hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format

operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the “LOAD

TO USER” LED ﬂash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the

device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either

or both devices.

Connection to a USB storage device

The CLP-370/340 has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and

one on the terminal at the bottom.

Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the

[SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on

the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the bottom.

When the device is mounting, the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator ﬂashes. When the

mounting operation is completed, the indicator goes off.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Export, Load, Delete or Format opera-

tions) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the FILE LOAD

LED ﬂash stops), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data.

CAUTION

Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] A terminal before

closing the key cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device.

Formatting USB storage media

When executing a ﬁle-related operation with a connected USB storage device, a “For”

message may appear, indicating that the device or media may be unformatted. If this

happens, format the media (page 40).

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution.

NOTE

CD-ROM drive

Although CD-R/RW drives can be

used to read data to the instru-

ment, they cannot be used for

saving data.

NOTE

Do not use a non-ID SmartMedia

card.

NOTE

Number of USB storage devices

Only one USB storage device can

be connected to the USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal. This instru-

ment can recognize only a single

drive in a USB storage device. If

one storage device contains more

than one drive, only one drive will

be automatically selected and

recognized.

NOTE

(CLP-370/340) If you connect

USB storage devices to both USB

[TO DEVICE] terminals, the

devices may not operate properly.

NOTE

Do not connect a USB hub to the

instrument.

NOTE

Remove the USB storage device

from the instrument before you

switch the A/B terminals.

NOTE

Though the instrument supports

the USB 1.1 standard, you can

connect and use a USB 2.0 stor-

age device with the instrument.

However, note that the transfer

speed is that of USB 1.1.

The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha can-

not guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices,

please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Man-

ual) for advice, or visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B

Select the desired terminal

Connections

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

To display the data in the USB storage device

To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG

SELECT] button a few times until the “USB” indicator lights (page 45).

To protect your data (write-protect):

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each

storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.

Backing up your data to a computer

■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your

computer, then archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. Simply reconnect the device as

shown below.

■ Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device

Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by ﬁrst

copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument.

Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI ﬁles created on other

devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer.

Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the

instrument, and play back the data on the instrument.

Instrument

USB storage

device

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Saves internal data to a USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it

to the computer.

Computer

USB storage device

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders.

Instrument

USB storage

device

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument.

Computer

USB storage device

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the

USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it

to the instrument.

Connections

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Connecting a Personal Computer

By connecting a computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data

between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. To do this, install the USB-MIDI driver and

Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”).

CAUTION

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power to both the Clavi-

nova and the computer before connecting any cables. After making connections, turn on the

power to the computer ﬁrst, then to the Clavinova.

CAUTION

If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must discon-

nect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a

cable is left connected.

Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST]

terminal on the Clavinova.

TERMINOLOGY

Driver:

A driver is software that provides

a data-transfer interface between

the computer’s operating system

and a connected hardware

device. You need to install a USB

MIDI driver to connect the com-

puter and the instrument.

NOTE

• The instrument will begin trans-

mission a short time after the

USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to

connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connec-

tion directly without passing

through a USB hub.

• For information on setting up

your sequence software, refer

to the owner’s manual of the

relevant software.

Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the

following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the

data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the com-

puter OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.

CAUTION

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-sav-

ing mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO

HOST] terminal.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/

unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted

only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or

more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on

again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

USB [TO HOST] terminal

USB cable

Computer

Instrument

Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Transmitting Song Data between the

Computer and the Instrument

In addition to the demo songs and the 50 piano preset songs stored in this instrument,

you can play data for other song by loading it from a connected computer. To be able to

use this function, you must ﬁrst download Musicsoft Downloader from Yamaha web-

site, and install it on your computer (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Instal-

lation Guide”).

System requirement for Musicsoft Downloader

Loading Song Data from a Computer

to the Instrument

You can load piano song data from a computer to this instrument. Also, after you

record your performance on this instrument and save the recording to a computer, you

can load the recording back to the instrument.

This instrument can read MIDI data in SMF Format 0. However, if such data includes

any information for functions that are not supported by this instrument, the instru-

ment will not play the data correctly.

For more information on loading song data from a computer to this instrument, please

refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected

data)” in the Help ﬁle that came with Musicsoft Downloader.

Requirements for song data that can be loaded from a computer to this instrument

You can play the loaded Songs (page 44).

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power to this instrument or unplug the instrument during data transmission.

Otherwise, the data being transmitted will not be saved. Furthermore, ﬂash memory operation

may become unstable, causing the entire memory to be erased when you turn the power to the

instrument on or off.

NOTE

You can download free Musicsoft

Downloader from the Yamaha

website.

NOTE

Do not manually change the ﬁle

name by using a computer; doing

so will render the ﬁle unable for

loading on the instrument.

NOTE

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This ﬁle features a popular

sequence format (for recording

performance data). This ﬁle is

sometimes called a “MIDI ﬁle.”

The ﬁle extension is MID.

You can play the SMF format

song using music software or a

sequencer that supports SMF.

This instrument also supports

SMF.

NOTE

Before you use this instrument,

close the Musicsoft Downloader

window and quit the application.

•OS:Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/Vista

*For XP and Vista, the 32-bit version is supported, but not the 64-bit version.

• CPU : Intel

Pentium

or Celeron

chip of 233MHz or Higher (500 MHz or higher is recom-

mended) or higher

• Memory : 64MB or more (256MB or more is recommended)

•Available hard : at least 128MB of free space (at least 512MB of free space is recommended)

disk capacity

• Display : 800 x 600 High Color (16-bit)

• Others : Microsoft

Internet Explorer

version 5.5 or higher

• Songs : user songs (loaded from instrument), SMF Format 0 songs

• Maximum data size : 748KB

• Data format : SMF Format 0

: Backuped data (loaded from instrument)

File name

08CLP-M.BUP (CLP-370/340)

08CLP-ML.BUP (CLP-330)

08CLP-S.BUP (CLPS308/S306)

Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Transmitting Song Data from the

Instrument to a Computer

Musicsoft Downloader enables you to transfer the user song in this instrument to a

computer. For more information on transferring song data from this instrument to a

computer, please refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument

(for unprotected data)” in the Help ﬁle that came with Musicsoft Downloader.

Data you can transfer from this instrument to a computer

• User song : your recorded songs

• Back up data : panel settings

• Song data (once it has been loaded from the computer)

Data Backup

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Data Backup

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you save your important data to your com-

puter by using the application Musicsoft Downloader (MSD). This provides a convenient backup if

the internal memory is damaged (refer to the “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation

Guide”).

Data that can be saved

• Panel settings and recorded User songs

Panel settings are the same data that can be backed up using the Backup Functions

(page 70). You can save the panel settings and recorded User songs as one ﬁle.

• External songs received via computer.

This includes external songs saved from the computer by using Musicsoft Downloader.

1. Install the USB MIDI driver and the MSD to your

computer (Windows), then connect the computer

and the instrument.

For installation, see the separate Installation Guide.

For connection, see page 75.

2. Move the data to the computer.

By using the MSD, save the “CLP-xxx.BUP” ﬁle from “System Drive” under

“Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer.

The “CLP-xxx.BUP” ﬁle contains the panel settings and recorded User songs.

Also, if you store the external songs in the instrument from the computer, move

the songs from “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the

computer via the MSD.

For instruction on using the MSD, see the Help in the MSD.

To recall the settings and load the songs to the instrument, move the “CLP-

xxx.BUP” ﬁle and the External songs under the folders to which you saved the

ﬁles.

NOTE

The ﬁle described in #1 at left

cannot be saved to a USB stor-

age device (CLP-370/340).

Procedure

NOTE

When MSD is started on a com-

puter connected to the instru-

ment, “con (computer

connection)” appears in the dis-

play. When this indication

appears, you cannot operate the

instrument.

NOTE

The Musicsoft Downloader can-

not be used when the instrument

is in the following state:

• During Demo mode.

• During song playback.

• During Record mode.

• During ﬁle operation (one of the

[FILE] button indicators is lit).

NOTE

The panel settings and User

songs (CLP-xxx.BUP ﬁle) remain

in the instrument after being

saved to the computer.

Message List

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Message List

* Regarding the messages (and their explanations) for Internet Direct Connection, refer to the Yamaha web site:

http://services.music.yamaha.com/

Message Comment

CLr Displayed after factory presets are recalled.

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “CLr” appears in the display. Doing so may delete all song

data in the instrument, including external songs (page 44).

con Displayed when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to the instrument.

When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument.

E01 Indicates failure in accessing the USB storage device because the device or media is damaged.

E02 Displayed when the song data is damaged or not recognized.

E04 Indicates that the song data is too large to be loaded.

End Displayed when the current operation is completed.

Err Displayed when the MIDI/USB cable is disconnected while starting Musicsoft Downloader on a computer con-

nected to the instrument.

FCL Indicates that internal memory has been cleaned up. Recorded songs, panel settings and external songs

which have been loaded from a computer are cleared, because the power has been turned off before the song

save or load operations were completed.

CAUTION

Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “FCL” appears in the display.

For Indicates that the instrument has engaged format mode for the USB storage device.

FUL Displayed when internal memory becomes full during song recording.

Displayed when the USB storage device becomes full and the song cannot be saved.

Displayed when the total amount of ﬁles has become too large.

Lod Displayed when a protected song is loading.

n y Conﬁrms whether each operation is executed or not.

–

Reconﬁrms whether the overwriting, delete or format operation is executed or not.

Pro Indicates that the USB storage device or media is protected.

Troubleshooting

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

Options

BC-100 Bench

A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova.

HPE-160 Stereo Headphones

High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads.

UD-FD01 USB-FDD Unit

Floppy disk drive for connecting to the instrument and saving/loading data.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into

the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 14).

A click or pop is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument.

Noise is heard from the speakers or head-

phones.

The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close

proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the

Clavinova.

The overall volume is low, or no sound is

heard.

• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level using the [MASTER

VOLUME] control.

• Make sure a pair of headphones is not connected to the headphones jack (when the

SPEAKER switch is set to the “NORMAL” position). If the SPEAKER switch is set to

the “OFF” position, set it to “NORMAL” or “ON” (page 15).

• Make sure that Local Control (page 68) is ON.

The speakers do not switch off when a pair of

headphones is connected.

The SPEAKER switch may be switched “ON.” Set the SPEAKER switch to the “NOR-

MAL” position (page 15).

The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound

continuously sustains even when the damper

pedal is not pressed.

The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the

pedal plug into the proper jack (pages 83, 86).

The speaker sound is changed.

The AUX OUT jack may be connected. Make sure to disconnect the plug (see page 71).

Even though a USB storage device is con-

nected, the SONG SELECT “USB” indicator

does not turn on when pressing the [SONG

SELECT] button.

The USB storage device may not be recognized by the instrument, depending on the

device itself or the timing of the recognition.

1. (CLP-370/340) cheek the [SELECT] switch.

Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B”

selects the terminal panel at the bottom.

2. Check that the device is not damaged.

Check that the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator ﬂashes after connecting the USB

storage device. If the indicator does not ﬂash, the device may be damaged.

3. Check that the compatibility of the device has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 73).

4. Select SONG SELECT “USB” again.

It may take a while for the instrument to recognize the USB storage device. Press

the [SONG SELECT] button again to turn the “USB” indicator on.

The USB storage device has hung up

(stopped).

• The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. Only use the devices

whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 73).

•Turn the instrument off and disconnect the device, then turn it back on and recon-

nect the device.

The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,” “LOAD

TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE]

button ﬂash simultaneously when a storage

device is connected.

Disconnect the USB storage device and turn the power of the instrument off. The USB

storage device is not compatible with the instrument.

The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,” “LOAD

TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE]

button ﬂash simultaneously for ﬁve seconds

when the USB storage device is operated.

Tr y disconnect the USB storage device once, then reconnect it.

Nothing is indicated in the LED display. Press the [–/NO] or [+YES] button and try again the operation again.

CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Assemble the unit on a ﬂat ﬂoor surface.

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the

unit in accordance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use only the included screws of the speciﬁed sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect

screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.

• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit.

•To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.

Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

Foamed styrol pads

Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them

on the ﬂoor, then place A on top of them.

Position the pads so that they will not block the speaker box

on the bottom of A.

A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side.

6 x 25 mm long screws x 4

6 x 16 mm short screws x 6

4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2

4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2

4 x 20 mm tapping

screws x 4

Headphone hanger

Cord holders x 2

Power cord

Assembly Parts

CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

1. Attach C to D and E.

1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord.

Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later

in step 5.

1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long

screws (6 x 25 mm).

2. Attach B.

Depending on the model of Clavinova you pur-

chased, the surface color of one side of B may be

different from the other side. In this case, posi-

tion B so that the side of the surface color most

similar to D and E faces you (as you would play

the instrument)

2-1 Align the screw holes on the upper side of B with

the bracket holes on D and E, then attach the

upper corners of B to D and E by ﬁnger-tighten-

ing two thin screws (4 x 12 mm).

2-2 Secure the bottom end of B using four tapping

screws (4 x 20 mm).

2-3 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that

were attached in Step 2-1.

3. Mount A.

Make sure that you mount the main unit by

holding the front bottom in areas that are at least

15 cm towards the center from either end and by

the handles on the rear panel.

CAUTION

Be extra careful not to drop or let your ﬁngers be pinched by the

main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the posi-

tion speciﬁed above.

4. Secure A.

4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right

ends of A will project beyond D and E equally

(as seen from the front).

4-2 Secure A by tightening six short screws (6 x 16

mm) from the front.

1-2

1-1

2-1

2-3

2-2

15 cm or further in

Align the screw

holes.

4-1

4-2

Projection of A

CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

5. Connect the pedal cord.

5-1 Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the

plug into the pedal connector.

5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as

shown, then clip the cord into the holders.

5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal

cord.

6. Connect the power cord.

6-1 Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a

voltage selector).

6-2 Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the

plug into the power connector.

7. Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in

ﬁrm contact with the ﬂoor surface.

8. Attach the headphone hanger.

Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to

attach the hanger as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold

instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit

and by the handles in the rear of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling

can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some

areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V

main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the

selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region

appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected,

connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC

wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in

some areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC

wall outlets in your area.

PED

240

127

110

220

6-1

5-2

5-3

6-2

5-1

After completing the assembly, please check the fol-

lowing.

• Are there any parts left over?

Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

Move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step

on the pedals?

Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into

the sockets?

Check the connection.

• If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you

play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly

diagrams

and retighten all screws.

Key cover

Hold here.

Do not hold

here.

Top portion

CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Assemble the unit on a ﬂat ﬂoor surface.

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please

assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use only the included screws of the speciﬁed sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of

incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.

• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit.

•To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.

Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

Foamed styrol pads

Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position

them on the ﬂoor, then place A on top of them.

Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors

on the bottom of A.

A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side.

6 x 25 mm long screws x 4

6 x 16 mm short screws x 4

4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2

4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2

4 x 20 mm tapping

screws x 4

Headphone hanger

Cord holders x 2

Power cord

Assembly Parts

CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

1. Attach C to D and E.

1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord.

Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later

in step 5.

1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long

screws (6 x 25 mm).

2. Attach B.

Depending on the model of Clavinova you pur-

chased, the surface color of one side of B may be

different from the other side. In this case, posi-

tion B so that the side of the surface color most

similar to D and E faces you (as you would play

the instrument).

2-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E,

then align the screw holes on the upper side of B

with the bracket holes on D and E.

2-2 Attach the top corners of B to D and E by ﬁnger-

tightening two thin screws (4 x 12 mm).

2-3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from

outside, secure the bottom end of B using four

tapping screws (4 x 20 mm).

2-4 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that

were attached in Step 2-2.

3. Mount A.

Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm from

either end of the main unit when positioning it.

CAUTION

Be extra careful not to drop or let your ﬁngers be pinched by the

main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the posi-

tion speciﬁed above.

4. Secure A.

4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right

ends of A will project beyond D and E equally (as

seen from the front).

4-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x 16

mm) from the front.

1-1

1-2

2-1

2-2

2-4

2-3

Place the bot-

tom end of the

rear panel on

each foot.

15 cm or

further in

15 cm or

further in

4-1

4-2

Projection

of A

Insert the screw in the front of

these two holes.

CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

5. Connect the pedal cord and power cord.

5-1 Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the

plug into the pedal connector.

5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as

shown, then clip the cord into the holders.

5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal

cord.

6. Connect the power cord.

6-1 Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a

voltage selector).

6-2 Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the

plug into the power connector.

7. Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in

ﬁrm contact with the ﬂoor surface.

8. Attach the headphone hanger.

Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to

attach the hanger as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the

bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling

can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some

areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V

main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the

selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region

appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected,

connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC

wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in

some areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC

wall outlets in your area.

PEDAL

5-3

6-16-2

5-2

5-1

After completing the assembly, please check the fol-

lowing.

• Are there any parts left over?

Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

Move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step

on the pedals?

Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into

the sockets?

Check the connection.

• If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you

play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly

diagrams

and retighten all screws.

Key cover

Hold here.

Top portion

Do not hold

here.

Do not hold

here.

CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Assemble the unit on a ﬂat ﬂoor surface.

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please

assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use only the included screws of the speciﬁed sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of

incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.

• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit.

•To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.

Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

Foamed styrol pads

Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position

them on the ﬂoor, then place A on top of them.

Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors

on the bottom of A.

Pedal cord

6 x 20 mm long screws x 10

6 x 16 mm short screws x 6

4 x 14 mm thin screws x 5

4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2

4 x 20 mm tapping

screws x 5

Headphone hanger

Cord holders x 2

Power cord

Assembly Parts

Connector panel

Protective

sheet

CAUTION

Please keep the protective sheet for later use. It will be used to

protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument

is transported. The protective sheet should be spread over the

entire keyboard before closing the key cover.

CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

1. Attach D to E and F.

1-1 Attach D to E and F by using four long screws

(6 x 20 mm).

1-2 Secure D from the rear using two long screws

(6 x 20 mm).

1-3 Remove the twist tie from the folded pedal cord.

Do not remove the twist tie that is located next to

the hole.

2. Temporarily mount B.

2-1

Insert B between E and F as shown in the illustration.

2-2 Align and attach B to the front side of D, E and F.

2-3 Temporarily secure B by ﬁnger-tightening four

long screws (6 x 20mm).

* Insert four screws into the larger holes (all four

holes) on the brackets.

2-4 Secure B using a thin screw (4 x 14 mm).

* Insert the screw into the smaller hole on the

bracket.

3. Mount A.

3-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end

of A to mount it.

3-2 Position A so that the stopper-wood on the rear

side of the bottom of A will be located behind the

front panel, then slide A slowly toward the rear

while lightly pushing E and F toward the center.

* Be sure to slide the guide pins 1 on each side of

A into the guide slots 2 on E and F respectively.

CAUTION

Be extra careful to avoid pinching your ﬁngers or dropping A.

CAUTION

Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the posi-

tion shown in the illustration.

4. Secure A.

4-1 Secure A from the rear using two short screws

(6 x 16 mm).

4-2 Secure A from the rear using two thin screws

(4 x 14 mm).

4-3 Secure A from the front using four short screws

(6 x 16mm).

4-4 Firmly tighten the screws you temporarily

fastened on B in steps 2-3 above.

1-1

1-2

1-3

2-2

2-1

2-3

2-4

15cm

3-1

3-2

further in

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

5. Connect the speaker cord.

5-1 Remove the twist tie attaching the speaker cord.

5-2 Insert the speaker cord plug into the connector

so that the protruding tab on the plug faces

toward right when viewed from the rear.

6. Connect the pedal cord.

6-1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the [PEDAL] con-

nector.

6-2 Attach the cord holders to the instrument as

shown, then clip the cord into the holders. At this

time, be careful not to allow too much slack in

the pedal cord between the plug and cord holder.

7. Attach C.

7-1 Place on D, the stopper-wood in the bottom

corners of C, then attach the top of C.

7-2 Secure upper right and left of C using two thin

screws (4 x 14 mm).

7-3 Secure upper center and bottom of C using ﬁve

tapping screws (4 x 20 mm).

8. Connect the power cord.

8-1 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the

voltage selector to an appropriate voltage.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the

Clavinova or result in improper operation.

8-2 Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC IN]

connector.

9. Set the adjuster to secure the pedals.

Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in

ﬁrm contact with the ﬂoor surface.

10.Attach the headphone hanger.

Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to

attach the hanger as shown in the illustration.

5-2

6-1

6-2

7-2

7-3

7-1

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some

areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V

main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the

selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region

appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected,

connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC

wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in

some areas to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC

wall outlets in your area.

CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

CAUTION

When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the

bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling

can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

CAUTION

When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard

with the protective sheet (page 87) before closing the key cover.

The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched.

After completing the assembly, please check the fol-

lowing.

• Are there any parts left over?

Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

Move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step

on the pedals?

Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into

the sockets?

Check the connection.

• If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you

play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly

diagrams

and retighten all screws.

Key cover

Top portion

Hold here.

Do not hold

here.

Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340)

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive

(CLP-370/340)

The optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using

the included ﬂoppy disk drive case and screws.

For the CLP-330 and CLP-S308/S306: The disk drive can be used with the instrument but cannot be

attached as described here. When using the ﬂoppy disk drive with these models, simply put the

drive on the top panel. Make sure to remove the connected disk cable before you close the key

cover.

1. Remove the three backing papers from

the adhesive tape in the case, and ﬁt the

ﬂoppy disk drive into the case.

2. Fold the USB cable inside the case as

shown.

3. Attach the drive and case assembly to the

left underside of the instrument, using the

included four screws (4mm x 10mm).

4. Connect the USB cable to the USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

Insert the drive to the case, with the side having

the rubber stoppers facing the case.

Dual-sided adhesive tape

Preset Voice List

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Preset Voice List

CLP-370/340

Voice Name

Stereo

Sampling

Touch

Response

Dynamic

Sampling

Key-Off

Sampling

Voice Descriptions

GRANDPIANO 1

Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also

includes four levels of dynamic sampling, sustain samples,

and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic

grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as

well as any other style that requires acoustic piano.

VARIATION

Warm and mellow piano. Good for classical compositions.

GRANDPIANO 2

Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popu-

lar music.

VARIATION

Bright, spacious piano. Good for popular or rock music.

E.PIANO 1

An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis.

Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according

to keyboard dynamics. Good for standard popular music.

VARIATION

A synth-generated type electronic piano sound often heard

in popular music. Used in the DUAL mode it blends well with

an acoustic piano voice.

E.PIANO 2

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic

“tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone

when played hard.

VARIATION

A slightly different electric piano sound often heard in rock

and popular music.

HARPSICHORD

The deﬁnitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsi-

chord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response.

There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when

the keys are released.

VARIATION

Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant

tone.

E. CLAVICHORD

A hammer-struck keyboard instrument that utilizes an elec-

tric pickup that is often heard in funk and soul music. Its tone

is noted for the unique sound produced when the keys are

released.

VARIATION

Includes a unique preset effect.

VIBRAPHONE

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone

becomes more metallic the harder you play.

VARIATION

Stereo-sampled, spacious, and realistic marimba.

CHURCH ORGAN

This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet).

Good for sacred music from the Baroque period.

VARIATION

This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with

Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.”

JAZZ ORGAN

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard

in jazz and rock idioms.

VARIATION

Uses a rotary speaker effect with a different speed. The vari-

ations speed is faster. If the variation is selected while hold-

ing a chord, the speed of the effect will gradually change.

STRINGS

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic

reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL

mode.

VARIATION

Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining

this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.

CHOIR

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmo-

nies in slow pieces.

VARIATION

A choir voice with a slow attack. Try combining this voice

with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.

: Yes

: No

Preset Voice List

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

GUITAR

Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet

ambience of nylon strings.

VARIATION

Bright, brilliant steel guitar. Suitable for popular music.

WOOD BASS

An upright bass played ﬁngerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin

music.

VARIATION

Adds a cymbal voice to the bass sound. Ideal for walking

bass lines in jazz tunes.

E.BASS

Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock,

popular, and more.

VARIATION

A fretless bass good for styles such as jazz, fusion, etc.

*1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of

an acoustic instrument.

*2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released.

Voice Name

Stereo

Sampling

Touch

Response

Dynamic

Sampling

Key-Off

Sampling

Voice Descriptions

Preset Voice List

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

CLP-330, CLP-S308/S306

Voice Name

Stereo

Sampling

Touch

Response

Dynamic

Sampling

*1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of

an acoustic instrument.

Key-Off

Sampling

*2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released.

Voice Descriptions

GRANDPIANO 1

Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect

for classical compositions as well as any other style that

requires acoustic piano.

GRANDPIANO 2

Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popu-

lar music.

E.PIANO 1

An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Good

for standard popular music.

E.PIANO 2

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic

“tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone

when played hard.

HARPSICHORD 1

The deﬁnitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsi-

chord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response.

There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when

the keys are released.

HARPSICHORD 2

Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant

tone.

VIBRAPHONE

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone

becomes more metallic the harder you play.

CHURCH ORGAN 1

This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet).

Good for sacred music from the Baroque period.

CHURCH ORGAN 2

This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with

Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.”

JAZZ ORGAN

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard

in jazz and rock idioms.

STRINGS 1

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic

reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL

mode.

STRINGS 2

Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining

this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.

CHOIR

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmo-

nies in slow pieces.

GUITAR

Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet

ambience of nylon strings.

: Yes

: No

Demo Song List

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Demo Song List

The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts of the original compositions.

Piano Voice Demo Description (CLP-370/340)

Voice Name CLP-370/340 CLP-330,

CLP-S308/

S306

Title Composer

GRAND PIANO1 Albumbard, Lyriske stykker

IV, op.47-2

E. H. Grieg

HARPSICHORD

Concerto a cembalo obbligato,

2 violini, viola e continuo

No.7, BWV.1058

J. S. Bach

HARPSICHORD1

HARPSICHORD2 Gigue, Französische Suiten

Nr.5, BWV.816

CHURCH ORGAN

Herr Christ, der ein’ge Gottes-

Sohn, BWV.601

CHURCH ORGAN1

CHURCH ORGAN2

Tr iosonate Nr.6, BWV.530

Voice Name Piano Voice Demo

GRAND PIANO1 Stereo sampling

GRAND PIANO2 Monaural sampling

E.PIANO1 With sustain sampling

E.PIANO2 Without sustain sampling

HARPSICHORD With key-off sampling

E.CLAVICHORD Without key-off sampling

: Included

: Not included

Index

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Index

Numerics

50 greats for the Piano.....................................................17

50 Piano Preset Songs......................................................17

A-B Repeat .......................................................................19

Adjust

Tempo (50 Piano Preset Songs) ...............................17

Tempo (Recorded Songs) .........................................44

Volume (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................17

Volume (Metronome) ..............................................67

ALL (LED display).....................................................17, 45

Assembly ..........................................................................81

AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks...............................................72

AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks...........................................71

Backup (Data)..................................................................78

Backup Functions ............................................................70

[BRILLIANCE] button....................................................22

Character Code................................................................70

Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ............................26

Connecting a Personal Computer.......................75, 76, 77

Connection to a USB storage device...............................73

Connections.....................................................................71

Computer.......................................................75, 76, 77

USB storage device ....................................................73

Connectors.......................................................................71

Damper Pedal ..................................................................21

Damper Pedal Range .......................................................65

[DAMPER RES.] button .................................................23

Damper Resonance..........................................................23

Delete ...............................................................................39

[DEMO] button...............................................................16

Demo Song List................................................................95

Demonstration Tunes .....................................................16

Display .............................................................................14

Dual mode .................................................................26, 64

[EFFECT] button.......................................................22, 23

Equal Temperament........................................................63

Export ..............................................................................36

Factory Setting List..........................................................98

[FILE] button .................................................................. 37

Fine Tuning of the Pitch .................................................62

Floppy Disk Drive ...........................................................42

Installation.................................................................91

Format ................................................................. 40, 41, 42

Function...........................................................................62

Basic Procedure.........................................................60

Parameter List ...........................................................59

Half-pedal........................................................................21

Hz (Hertz) .......................................................................62

Internet Direct Connection ............................................46

Internet Settings ..............................................................49

Internet song....................................................................56

Key Cover ........................................................................12

Keyboard Stand ...............................................................81

Keyoff Sample Volume ...................................................66

Kirnberger........................................................................63

LAN Port driver...............................................................53

LAN Settings..............................................................49, 70

[LAN] terminal................................................................72

[LEFT] button ........................................................... 18, 33

Left Pedal .........................................................................21

Left Pedal Mode...............................................................66

List

Factory Setting........................................................... 98

Functions...................................................................59

Preset Voice ...............................................................94

Load ..................................................................... 36, 38, 45

[MASTER VOLUME] slider...........................................15

Mean Tone.......................................................................63

Index

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH

Message List .....................................................................79

Metronome ......................................................................29

METRONOME [ON/OFF] button...........................67, 29

Metronome Volume........................................................67

MIDI ................................................................................72

MIDI Functions...............................................................67

MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals............................72

Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ..........................................14

Music Rest........................................................................13

Musicsoft Downloader ....................................................78

Normal setting .................................................................22

Part Cancel.......................................................................18

Part Playback On and Off................................................45

[PEDAL] jack...................................................................83

Pedal Play/Pause ..............................................................45

Pedals ...............................................................................21

[PHONES] jacks..............................................................15

Piano Voice Demo Description ......................................95

[PLAY/PAUSE] button..............................................16, 17

Play/Pause playback

Useful Playback Functions........................................45

Playing Back Songs ....................................................43, 44

[POWER] switch .............................................................14

Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs.18

Preset Song.......................................................................17

Preset Voice List.........................................................92, 94

Program version number ................................................53

Pure Major.......................................................................63

Pure Minor.......................................................................63

Pythagorean .....................................................................63

[REC] button ...................................................................31

Recording.........................................................................30

Initial Settings............................................................35

RIGHT/LEFT parts....................................................33

Re-recording ..............................................................32, 34

[REVERB] button............................................................22

[RIGHT] button ........................................................18, 33

Right Pedal.......................................................................21

rnd (LED display)......................................................17, 45

Save.............................................................................36, 37

Scale..................................................................................63

[SELECT] switch .............................................................73

SMF (Standard MIDI File)..............................................36

Soft Pedal................................................................... 21, 66

Soft Pedal Effect Depth ...................................................66

Song .................................................................................17

SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button ........................... 16, 17, 44

[SONG SELECT] button ..........................................17, 44

SONG [STOP] button...............................................17, 44

[SPEAKER] switch ..........................................................15

Specifications.................................................................100

SPLIT (CLP-370/340) (Function) ..................................65

[SPLIT] button................................................................27

Split mode..................................................................27, 65

Split Point .................................................................. 27, 65

Sustain Sample Depth .....................................................66

Sync (Synchronized) .......................................................45

Sync Start ......................................................................... 18

[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button ................................ 29, 60

[TOUCH] button............................................................24

Touch Sensitivity............................................................. 24

Transporting...................................................................... 6

[TRANSPOSE] button....................................................25

Transposition ..................................................................25

Troubleshooting.............................................................. 80

USB Storage Device................................................... 40, 73

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal .................................... 72, 73

USB [TO HOST] terminal........................................72, 75

USB-LAN Adapter...........................................................54

[VARIATION] button ....................................................22

Voice ................................................................................20

Voice group buttons........................................................20

Werckmeister...................................................................63

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen /

Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica

Function

Default

Backup Group

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330,

CLP-S308/

S306

Voice GRAND PIANO 1

F8.1

F7.1

Variation (CLP-370/340) OFF —

Dual Mode OFF F7.1

Split Mode (CLP-370/340) OFF

—

Split Mode Left Voice (CLP-370/340) WOOD BASS

Brilliance NORMAL F8.4 F7.4

Reverb Type Preset for each voice

F8.1 F7.1

Reverb Depth Preset for each voice

Effect Type Preset for each voice

Effect Depth Preset for each voice

Touch Sensitivity MEDIUM

Volume in the FIXED Mode 64

DAMPER RES. ON F8.4 —

DAMPER RES. Depth 6 F8.4 —

Metronome OFF — —

Metronome Time Signature 0 (no accent) — —

Tempo 120 — —

Transpose 0 F8.3 F7.3

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330,

CLP-S308/

S306

Function Default

Backup Group

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330,

CLP-S308/

S306

F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz

F8.3 F7.3F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament)

F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C

F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination

F8.1 F7.1

F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination

F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination

F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination

F4.1 — Split Point F



F4.2 — Split Balance Preset for each voice combination

F4.3, F4.4 — Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination

F4.5, F4.6 — Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination

F4.7 — Damper Pedal Range ALL

F5.1 F4.1 Left Pedal Mode 1 (Soft Pedal)

F8.4 F7.4

F5.2 F4.2 Soft Pedal Effect Depth 3

F5.3 — Sustain Sample Depth 12

F5.4 — Keyoff Sample Volume 10

F5.5 F4.3 Song Channel Selection ALL

F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10 F8.1 F7.1

Appendix

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

F7.1 F6.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1

F8.2 F7.2

F7.2 F6.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL

F7.3 F6.3 Local Control ON

F7.4 F6.4 Program Change Send &

Receive

F7.5 F6.5 Control Change Send &

Receive

F8 F7 Backup Voice: OFF

MIDI – Others: ON

Always backed up

F8.5 F7.5 Character Code Int

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330,

CLP-S308/

S306

Function Default

Backup Group

CLP-370/

340

CLP-330,

CLP-S308/

S306

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

100

Speciﬁcations / Technische Daten /

Caractéristiques techniques / Especiﬁcaciones

CLP-370 CLP-340 CLP-330 CLP-S308 CLP-S306

Size /

Weight

Width 1408 mm (55-7/16") 1449 mm (57-1/16")

Height

[For models with

polished ﬁnish]

917 mm (36-1/8")

[920 mm (36-1/4")]

[977 mm (38-7/16")]

Height with music

rest

[For models with

polished ﬁnish]

1018 mm (40-1/16")

[1019 mm (40-1/8")]

1019 mm (40-1/8")

[1021 mm (40-3/16")]

—

Depth

511mm (20-1/8") 514mm (20-1/4") 430 mm (16-15/16")

Weight

[For models with

polished ﬁnish]

78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.)

[81 kg (178lbs., 9 oz.)]

69 kg (152lbs., 2 oz.)

[71 kg (156lbs., 8 oz.)]

65 kg (143lbs., 5 oz.)

[68 kg (149lbs., 15 oz.)]

[78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.)]

Control

Interface

Number of Keys 88

Keyboard Type

(Natural Wood)

with

Synthetic ivory

keytops

(Wood is used for the

white keys)

GH3

(Graded Hammer 3)

with Synthetic ivory

keytops

GH3

(Graded Hammer 3)

(Natural Wood)

with

Synthetic ivory

keytops

(Wood is used for

the white keys)

GH3

(Graded Hammer 3)

with Synthetic ivory

keytops

Touch Sensitivity Ye s

Number of Pedal 3

Half Pedal Ye s

Pedal Functions Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft

Display 7-Segment LED

Cabinet

Key Cover Style Sliding Folding

Music Rest Yes

Music Clips Yes

—

Voices

Tone Generation

Technology

AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Stereo Sustain

Samples

Ye s

—

Key-off Samples Ye s

—

Number of Polyphony

(Max.)

128

Number of Voices

14 x 2

variations

Effect

Reverb 4 types

Brilliance 5 types

Chorus Yes

Dual Yes

Split Yes

—

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

101

*Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify

products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

*Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor,

Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modiﬁzieren. Da die technischen Daten, das

Gerät selbst bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.

*Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de

changer ou modiﬁer les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les

équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.

* Las especiﬁcaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el

derecho a efectuar cambios o modiﬁcaciones en los productos o especiﬁcaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especiﬁca-

ciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha.

Songs

Number of Preset

Songs

Recording

Number

of Songs

Number

of Tracks

Data

Capacity

User songs (100KB X 3 (ca.11,000 notes X 3)),

External songs (447KB)

Compatible

Data

Format

Playback

SMF (Format 0 & 1)

Recording

SMF (Format 0)

Functions

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 32-280

Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12

Tuning Yes

Scale Type 7 types

Storage

Floppy Disk Drive Optional

Internal Memory User songs 300KB, External songs 447KB

External Device Optional

Connectivity

Headphones x 2

MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU]

AUX IN [L/L+R][R]

AUX OUT [L/L+R][R]

USB [TO DEVICE]

x 2

(selectable)

x 1

USB [TO HOST] Yes

[LAN] Yes

—

Ye s

Ampliﬁers/

Speakers

Ampliﬁers 40W x 2 20W x 2 40W x 2

Speakers (16cm + 5cm) x 2 16cm x 2 (16cm + 5cm) x 2

Speaker Boxes Ye s

—

Ye s

Bundled

Software

CD-ROM Ye s

Accessories

Included Accessories

Owner’s Manual, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows,

Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide,

“50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection,

My Yamaha Product User Registration,

Bench (included or optional depending on locale)

CLP-370 CLP-340 CLP-330 CLP-S308 CLP-S306

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

102

MEMO

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

103

MEMO

CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual

104

MEMO

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and main-

tenance (servicing) instructions in the litera-

ture accompanying the product.

The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-

pod, bracket, or table speciﬁed by

the manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to avoid

injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused

for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel. Ser-

vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-

aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is

damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen

into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved

by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the

FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc-

tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your

FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-

tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compli-

ance with these requirements provides a reasonable

level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful inter-

ference with other electronic devices. This equipment

generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed

and used according to the instructions found in the

users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by turn-

ing the unit “OFF” and “ON,” please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation

of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangeth-

orpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its sub-

sidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings

identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected

to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or

coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment

: Digital Piano

Model Name : CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308PE/

S306PE

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following conditions:

this device may not cause harmful interference, and

this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception

is suspected.

• This applies only to products distributed by

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires) * This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB45

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WN75950 109MWAP*.*-**B1 Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

DIC 2164

Documenttranscriptie

OWNER’S MANUAL ENGLISH DEUTSCH CLP-370/340/330 CLP-S308/S306 BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES —Check your power supply— Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. WICHTIG IMPORTANT IMPORTANTE Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen Stromnetz mit der Spannung übereinstimmt, die auf dem Typenschild auf der Unterseite des Instruments angegeben ist. In bestimmten Regionen ist auf der Unterseite des Keyboards in der Nähe des Netzkabels ein Spannungswähler angebracht. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Spannungswähler auf die Spannung Ihres lokalen Stromnetzes eingestellt ist. Dieser Spannungswähler ist bei Auslieferung auf 240 V eingestellt. Sie können die Einstellung mit einem Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern. Drehen Sie dazu den Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf dem Instrument auf die richtige Spannung zeigt. Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza "recta" para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. —Überprüfen Sie Ihren Netzanschluss— Weitere Informationen über die Montage des Keyboard-Ständers erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen am Ende dieses Handbuchs. —Contrôler la source d'alimentation— Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'assemblage du support du clavier, reportez-vous aux instructions à la fin de ce manuel. —Verifique la alimentación de corriente— ESPAÑOL IMPORTANT FRANÇAIS MODE D’EMPLOI Para información sobre el montaje del soporte del teclado, consulte las instrucciones al final de este manual. EN DE FR ES Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 (bottom) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Model Serial No. Purchase Date Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following: Owner’s Manual (this book) Reference (page 16): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Appendix (page 98): This section introduces reference material. ENGLISH Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. Data List You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library. Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as “CLP-370”) in the Model Name text box, then click the Search button. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ * The models CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this owner’s manual. * The illustrations and LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. * The panel illustrations shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the CLP-370. * Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: ENGLISH Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. (1)B-12 4 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 1/2 • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Using the bench (If included) • (For polish-finished model) Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument’s finish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • (For polish-finished model) Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. Saving data ENGLISH Maintenance Saving and backing up your data • Data in the instrument’s internal memory can be lost due to operational errors or malfunction. Be sure to save any important data to external media via a computer connected to the instrument. (page 78) Backing up the USB Storage device • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-12 2/2 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 5 Accessories • “50 greats for the Piano” (Music Book) • Owner’s Manual This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova. • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide • Bench A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale. • My Yamaha Product User Registration ENGLISH The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. CAUTION (CLP-S308/S306) Cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) packaged with the instrument before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument is transported. 6 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Features Highly evolved touch and expression: Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard (CLP-330) and Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard with artificial ivory top (CLP-340, CLP-S306) The Graded Hammer keyboard features natural grand-piano type key weights (heavier in the low range and lighter in the higher range) providing a pleasant playability that is unmatched by conventional electronic pianos. Ultimate natural playability: Natural Wood (NW) keyboard with artificial ivory top (CLP-370, CLP-S308) ENGLISH The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for legato (without pedal operation) and repetitivestriking techniques, as with a grand piano. The CLP-340 and CLP-S306 feature an “artificial ivory” keyboard top, which simulates the moderate hygroscopic characteristics of real ivory and offers a less slippery surface, smooth key movement, and a warm and inviting color. In addition to the features offered by the GH3 keyboard with artificial ivory top model, the NW keyboard uses natural wood for the inside of the white keys, as seen on an acoustic piano. This feature provides a heavier weighted touch that surpasses that of conventional electronic pianos and is closer in feel to a grand piano. Digital recording of a full-size concert grand piano sound (via AMW Dynamics Stereo Sampling) This digital piano offers a rich and versatile range of sounds, which are created using Yamaha's proprietary sampling tone-generation system, “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling.” AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) is a sampling system that creates sounds close to those of an acoustic instrument by digitally recording the sounds of an instrument and applying high-quality digital filtering technology to the recorded audio samples. The sound waveform created by an acoustic piano differs depending on the player's strength of touch, from pianissimo to fortissimo. AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling can create extremely dynamic nuances by recording samples at various playing strengths. The greater the number of samples used, the greater the resulting expressiveness of the instrument. The piano voice “Grand Piano 1” features a totally new sample recorded from a full-size concert grand piano. Each note in the sample has been adjusted meticulously so that the digital piano will play only the very best piano sounds. The piano voices are well-separated sounds featuring a fast attack and a satisfying response. The “Grand Piano 1” voice features multiple wave samples for different velocities (Dynamic Sampling). That is, different samples are used depending on how fast or strong the player strikes the keys. Therefore, this voice expresses detailed dynamics and sounds much closer to those of a true acoustic piano. The CLP-370/340 creates a rich, luxurious sound using “Sustain Sampling,” which is a sample of the soundboard and the resonance of the strings when the damper pedal is pressed. The instrument also features “Key-off Sampling,” which is a sample of the very delicate noises that are caused when keys are released. Internet Direct Connection function (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) You can connect these digital piano models to the Internet, enabling you to access and enjoy a broad range of song data files that are available on a dedicated website. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 7 Table of Contents ENGLISH Introduction About this Owner’s Manual and Data List.............................................................................. 3 Accessories............................................................................................................................... 6 Panel Controls and Terminals ............................................................................................... 10 Before Using the Clavinova................................................................................................... 12 Key Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Music Rest .................................................................................................................................................... 13 Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ...................................................................................................................... 14 Turning the Power On ................................................................................................................................ 14 Setting the Volume ...................................................................................................................................... 15 Using Headphones....................................................................................................................................... 15 Using the Speaker Switch ............................................................................................................................ 15 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes ................................................................................. 16 Reference Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................................................... 17 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) .................................... 18 A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs................................................................................................................... 19 Selecting & Playing Voices .................................................................................................... 20 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................ 20 Using the Pedals........................................................................................................................................... 21 Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/ [EFFECT]/[DAMPER RES.] ....................................................................................................................... 22 Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH].................................................................................................................. 24 Transposition — [TRANSPOSE] ............................................................................................................... 25 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ........................................................................................................ 26 Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340) ............ 27 Using the Metronome ................................................................................................................................. 29 Recording Your Performance................................................................................................ 30 Recording a performance quickly............................................................................................................... 30 Playing back a recorded song ...................................................................................................................... 32 Re-recording a previously recorded song................................................................................................... 32 Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts ............................................................................................................... 33 Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) ............................................... 35 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device......................................................................... 36 About Save and Load................................................................................................................................... 36 Saving a Song ............................................................................................................................................... 37 Loading a Song............................................................................................................................................. 38 Deleting Song Files ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Formatting the USB Storage Device ........................................................................................................... 40 Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc.) ............................................ 41 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks....................................................................... 42 Playing Back Songs................................................................................................................ 43 Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument............................................................................... 44 Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device ............................................................................... 45 Useful Playback Functions .......................................................................................................................... 45 8 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ............................................... 46 Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection .................................................................................. 46 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet................................................................................................ 48 About the Internet Settings ......................................................................................................................... 49 Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) .................................................. 51 Exporting the Connection Information ..................................................................................................... 52 Other Internet Operations .......................................................................................................................... 53 Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ................................... 56 Glossary of Internet Terms.......................................................................................................................... 57 Initializing the data...................................................................................................................................... 58 Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] ......................................................................................... 59 Basic Procedure in Function Mode ............................................................................................................ 60 About Each Function................................................................................................................................... 62 F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch.................................................................................................................. 62 F2. Selecting a Scale ............................................................................................................................... 63 F3. Dual Mode Functions...................................................................................................................... 64 F4. (CLP-370/340) Split Mode Functions ............................................................................................ 65 F5. (CLP-370/340) / F4. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Other Functions .............................................. 66 F6. (CLP-370/340) / F5. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Metronome Volume ....................................... 67 F7. (CLP-370/340) / F6. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Functions .............................................. 67 F8. (CLP-370/340) / F7. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Backup Functions............................................ 70 F8.5 (CLP-370/340)/ F7.5 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Character Code ............................................ 70 F9. (CLP-370/340)/ F8. (CLP-S308/S306) LAN Settings ..................................................................... 70 Connections........................................................................................................................... 71 Connectors ................................................................................................................................................... 71 Connection to a USB storage device........................................................................................................... 73 Connecting a Personal Computer .............................................................................................................. 75 Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument ................................ 76 Loading Song Data from a Computer to the Instrument.......................................................................... 76 Transmitting Song Data from the Instrument to a Computer ................................................................. 77 Data Backup........................................................................................................................... 78 Message List .......................................................................................................................... 79 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 80 Options .................................................................................................................................. 80 CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly ..................................................................................... 81 CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................. 84 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly.......................................................................... 87 Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340) .................................................... 91 Preset Voice List .................................................................................................................... 92 Demo Song List ..................................................................................................................... 95 Index...................................................................................................................................... 96 Appendix Factory Setting List................................................................................................................ 98 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 100 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Panel Controls and Terminals The panel illustrations shown are taken from the CLP-370. 2 3 4 5 6 ! 8 9 ) @ * ENGLISH 7 # $ % ^ ( & 1 SELECT USB TO DEVICE CLP-370/340 only This illustration shown is taken from the CLP-370. OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER ∞ ¢ PHONES Pedal jack for CLP-340/330 is next to the MIDI jacks. Pedal jack for CLP-S308/S306 is next to the LAN Jack. Front CLP-370/340/330 ¶ OUT MIDI L/L+R AUX IN º £ § CLP-370/ 340 only TO DEVICE USB TO HOST R IN L/L+R R ¡ AUX OUT THRU Shows the jacks as seen when viewed from below the instrument. ™ ( CLP-S308/S306 CLP-370/ 340 only Front Left Shows the jacks as seen when viewed from below the instrument. 10 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Right ™ £ ¡ º § Panel Controls and Terminals Adjust the volume level using this slider. 3 [DEMO] button ..............................page 16 Demonstration playback is available for each voice. 4 [TRANSPOSE] button.....................page 25 You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same, unshifted keys. 5 [REC] button .................................page 30 For recording your keyboard performance. 6 [RIGHT], [LEFT] buttons ............................................... pages 18, 33 For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. ^ [BRILLIANCE], [REVERB], [EFFECT] buttons .......................................... page 22 For adjusting the brightness of the sound and adding reverb effects to the sound. & [TOUCH] button ............................ page 24 For adjusting the touch response. * [DAMPER RES.] button ................. page 23 For turning the Damper Resonance function on or off. When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. ( USB [TO DEVICE] terminals ........... page 72 For connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, allowing saving/loading of data to and from the connected device. On the CLP-370 and CLP-340, there are two TO DEVICE terminals, A and B, which can be specified using the [SELECT] switch. 7 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons ............................................... pages 16, 44 º AUX OUT [L/ L+R][R] jacks ............ page 71 For playing back the preset songs or your recorded songs, etc. You can also play back songs from the Internet over a special website. ¡ AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ............... page 72 8 [SONG SELECT] button ......... pages 17, 56 For selecting a song to play back or edit. 9 [FILE] button ......................... pages 36, 40 For saving songs to and loading songs from a USB storage device, as well as managing song files. Also, lets you format a USB storage device. ) [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button ............................................... pages 29, 60 For changing the song tempo (speed) and selecting other useful functions (pages 59 – 70). ! [METRONOME] button ............................................... pages 29, 67 For using the metronome. @ Display............................................page 14 CAUTION Do not turn off the power to the instrument while flashing dashes appear in the display (indicating the operation is in process). Doing so may damage the data. # [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons For setting values or performing file operations. Pressing both buttons simultaneously for certain value settings (Transpose, Tempo, etc.) restores the default value. $ Voice group buttons ......................page 20 For selecting voices from 14 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1 and 2. You can also combine two voices and use them together. (Only the CLP-370 and CLP-340 has the [VARIATION] button.) ENGLISH 1 [POWER] switch .............................page 14 2 [MASTER VOLUME] slider..............page 15 For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to an external audio system. For connecting an external tone generator, allowing you to play the sound of that device via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. ™ USB [TO HOST] terminal .............. page 72 For connecting the instrument to your computer, allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and the computer. £ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals ....................................................... page 72 For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of various MIDI functions. ¢ [PHONES] jacks, [SPEAKER] switch ....................................................... page 15 For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones, allowing private practice. The [SPEAKER] switch turns the internal speakers on or off. ∞ PEDALS........................................... page 21 For producing a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. The left pedal can also be assigned to a variety of functions. § [LAN] jack (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ....................................................... page 72 For connecting a LAN cable to access special Internet websites for this instrument, and playing songs from the Internet. ¶ [PEDAL] jack .................................. page 83 For connecting a pedal cable. % [SPLIT] button (CLP-370/340) .......page 27 For playing different voices on the left- and righthand sections of the keyboard. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 11 Before Using the Clavinova Before Using the Clavinova Key Cover CLP-370/340/330 To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: ENGLISH Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CLP-S308/S306 To open the key cover: To close the key cover: 1. Hold the front edge of the key cover top with both hands, then open the key cover slowly. 1. If the music rest is unfolded, fold it back. CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers (or those of children) when opening or closing it. 2. Close the edge of the key cover. (Fold it down so that it is flat with the cover.) 2. Unfold the edge of the key cover. 3. Hold the key cover with both hands and close it slowly. CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers (or those of children) when opening or closing it. 12 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Before Using the Clavinova CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers or the fingers of child when opening or closing it. CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. CAUTION Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] A terminal before closing the key cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device. ENGLISH CAUTION (CLP-S308/S306) When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched. Music Rest CLP-370/340/330 To raise the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. To lower the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. CLP-S308/S306 Unfold the music rest When opening the key cover, unfold the music rest. Fold the music rest When closing the key cover, fold the music rest. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 13 Before Using the Clavinova Music Braces (CLP-370/340) These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To open To close ENGLISH Turning the Power On 1.Connect the power cord. Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC IN on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet. In some areas, a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1-1 CLP-370/340/330 Shows the AC IN as seen when viewed from below the instrument. (bottom surface) 1-2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) CLP-S308/S306 AC IN is located on the rear of the instrument. WARNING Make sure your instrument is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the AC IN. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the Clavinova. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the Clavinova may be different depending on the countr y in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the Clavinova. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2.Turn the power on. Press the [POWER] switch. • The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. [POWER] switch Power indicator Display Normally indicates tempo. When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again. • The display and the power indicator turn off. NOTE Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. 14 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Before Using the Clavinova Setting the Volume Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about halfway between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level. The level decreases. The level increases. CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time; doing so may damage your hearing. TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: NOTE You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX OUT level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. You can connect two sets of standard stereo headphones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either jack.) ENGLISH The volume level of the entire keyboard sound. bottom surface OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER standard stereo phone plug PHONES Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the Clavinova package so that you can conveniently hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Doing so may damage the Clavinova or the hanger. Using the Speaker Switch OFF This switch turns the internal speakers on or off. NORMAL (HP. SW) ......... The speakers produce sound as long as a pair of headphones is not connected. ON ....................................... The speakers always produce sound. OFF ...................................... The speakers produce no sound. ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER PHONES CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 15 Reference Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the Clavinova’s voices. 1 2 4 4 3 3 CLP-370 ENGLISH Procedure 1. Turn the power on. (In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] switch. When the power is turned ON, one of the voice button LEDs will light. Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about half way between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level. 2. Engage Demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage Demo mode. The voice button indicators will flash in sequence. 3. Play a Voice demo. Press one of the voice buttons to start playback of all songs starting from the corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that voice button. (If you press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button instead of a voice button or only waiting (not press any keys) a short while, the GRAND PIANO 1 demo tune will begin playback.) 4. Stop the Voice demo and exit from Demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or SONG [STOP] button. NOTE For a list of the demo songs, see page 95. NOTE MIDI reception is not possible in Demo Song mode. Demo song data is not transmitted via the MIDI terminals. NOTE Demo mode cannot be engaged during User song recording (page 30) or file operations (page 36). TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In Demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE You cannot adjust the tempo of demo songs. You cannot use the part cancel function (page 18) or the song A-B repeat function (page 19) in Demo mode. NOTE On the CLP-370/340, you can demo the piano voices with various effects by pressing the [VARIATION] button, then pressing the desired voice button. Refer to the “Piano Voice Demo Description” on page 95 for the complete list of demo sounds for the piano voices with various effects. 16 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can simply listen to these songs or use them for practice (page 18). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” that contains scores for the 50 piano preset songs. 3 2 -2 1 4 2 -1 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage Preset Song mode. Press the [SONG SELECT] button a few times until the “PRESET” indicator lights. 2. Play any of the 50 preset songs. 2-1 2-2 Press the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select a number of the tune you want to play (the number will appear on the LED display) or select a playing method. 1 – 50: Select a preset song number and play only the song. r n d: Play all preset songs continuously in random order. ALL: Play all preset songs in sequence. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Adjust the Volume You can play the keyboard along with the preset song. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. Adjust the Tempo 3. Stop playback. TERMINOLOGY Song: Performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. NOTE Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume. You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [▼] and [▲] buttons. NOTE Preset Song mode cannot be engaged while the unit is in Demo Song mode (page 16) or during song playback (page 44), User song recording (page 30), or file operations (page 36). NOTE This produces a relative tempo variation, with a range from “–50” through “0” to “50” at maximum; the range will differ depending on the selected song. Playback will stop automatically when the selected preset song has finished. To stop the song during playback (or continuous playback), press the SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. • To play back another song continuously, see procedure 2 above. 4. Exit from Preset Song mode. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to exit Preset Song mode. The indicator turns off, and the unit returns to normal play mode. How to use the practice functions You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (part cancel function) and continuously repeat a specified phrase within a song (song A-B repeat function). For more information, see pages 18–19. You can adjust the Brilliance control (page 22) and Reverb type (page 22) that is applied to preset song playback. You can change the Effect settings (page 23) and Touch sensitivity (page 24) for the keyboard voice you play. NOTE The default tempo “0” is automatically selected whenever a new preset song is selected, or when playback of a new preset song begins during “ALL” or “r n d” playback. NOTE When you select a different song (or a different song is selected during chained playback), appropriate reverb and effect types will be selected accordingly. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 17 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as desired, in order to practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part is played by [LEFT]. ENGLISH 3 1 2 CLP-370 Procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button to turn off the corresponding part. When you first select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. • Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles playback between on and off. NOTE The Preset Song Part Cancel function cannot be used during “ALL” or “r n d” (page 17) playback. NOTE The parts can be turned on or off even during playback. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) When the Sync Start function is engaged, playback of the selected preset song will begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard. To engage the Sync Start function, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP] and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. Left Pedal Play/Pause The left pedal can be assigned to play and pause preset song playback via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. 18 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever a new song is selected. Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a specified phrase within a preset song. Combined with the Part Cancel function described on page 18, this provides an excellent way to practice difficult phrases. 2 1 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Specify the beginning (A) and the end (B) of the phrase, and start practicing. Select and play a preset song, then press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION] button at the beginning of the phrase you want to repeat. This sets the “A” point ( play). NOTE The A-B Repeat function cannot be used during “ALL” or “r n d” (page 17) playback. will appear on the dis- NOTE To specify the end (B) of the phrase, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button a second time at the end of the phrase. • To set the “A” point at the very beginning of the song, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button before starting playback. • You can have the B point automatically be set to the song’s end, by setting the A point and letting the song play to the end. This sets the “B” point ( will appear on the display). At this point, repeat playback will begin between the specified A and B points. NOTE An automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase) starts at the A point of the song. 2. Stop playback. Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback while retaining the specified A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if you press the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. To cancel the A and B points, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button once. NOTE The A and B points are automatically canceled when a new song is selected. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 19 Selecting & Playing Voices Selecting & Playing Voices Selecting Voices Voice buttons ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure Select the desired voice by pressing one of the Voice buttons. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider for the most comfortable listening level. NOTE To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice (page 16). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92 for more information on the characteristics of each preset voice. TERMINOLOGY Voice: On the Clavinova, a voice means a “tone” or “tonal color.” NOTE You can control the loudness of a voice by adjusting the force with which you strike the keys, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92. 20 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Using the Pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Sostenuto (Center) Pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. TERMINOLOGY: Half-pedal: While playing the piano with Sustain and you want to slightly mute the sustained sound, release the damper pedal from maximum position to half position. NOTE The depth of the effect produced by the “Sustain Samples” can be adjusted via the “Sustain Sample Depth” (page 66) in Function mode. ENGLISH Damper (Right) Pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-pedal function. When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. NOTE If the damper pedal doesn’t work, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the jack (pages 83, 86). NOTE Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft (Left) Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. NOTE The left pedal can be assigned to song play/pause operation or variation function (CLP-370/340) via the “Left Pedal Mode” described on page 66. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 21 Selecting & Playing Voices Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[EFFECT]/ [DAMPER RES.] [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons [VARIATION] button [REVERB] button [DAMPER RES.] button ENGLISH CLP-370 [BRILLIANCE] button [EFFECT] button [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340) Lets you alter another aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92 for more information on the characteristics of each variation. Procedure Pressing the [VARIATION] or selected voice button toggles the variation on and off. The indicator lights (ON) when [VARIATION] is enabled. [BRILLIANCE] This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre” of the sound output. BRIGHT: NORMAL: MELLOW: Bright tone Standard tone Soft and mellow tone NOTE Normal setting = OFF TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE The left pedal can be assigned to ON or OFF the variation via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66. NOTE Normal setting = NORMAL Procedure To select a brilliance type, press the [BRILLIANCE] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicator lights in sequence each time you press the [BRILLIANCE] button). Brilliance can be selected among five types. When two adjacent indicators are lit, the type that is between the two indicated types is selected. For example, when both NORMAL and MELLOW are lit, the brilliance setting between NORMAL and MELLOW is selected. This parameter affects the entire sound of the instrument. NOTE When the BRILLIANCE is set to BRIGHT, the overall sound will be slightly louder. If the MASTER VOLUME is set at a high level the sound may become distorted. If so, lower the MASTER VOLUME level. [REVERB] This control enables you to select various digital reverb effects that would add extra depth and expression to the sound to create a realistic acoustic ambience. OFF: ROOM: HALL 1: HALL 2: STAGE: 22 When no reverb effect is selected, no REVERB indicator is lit. This setting adds a continuous reverb effect to the sound, similar to the acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room. For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall. For a truly spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall. Simulates the reverb of a stage environment. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE The default reverb type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. NOTE Releasing the [REVERB] button changes the reverb type. If you have changed the reverb depth, releasing the [REVERB] button will not change the reverb type. Selecting & Playing Voices Procedure To select an reverb type, press the [REVERB] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press the [REVERB] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off. NOTE Depth 0: no effect Depth 20: maximum reverb depth [EFFECT] The [EFFECT] button allows you to select an effect to give your sound greater depth and animation. OFF: CHORUS: PHASER: TREMOLO: ROTARY SP: When no effect is selected, no EFFECT indicator is lit. A shimmering, broadening effect Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Tremolo effect Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. NOTE The default effect type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. ENGLISH Adjusting Reverb Depth Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [REVERB] button is held. NOTE Releasing the [EFFECT] button changes the effect type. If you have changed the depth settings, releasing the [EFFECT] button will not change the effect type. Procedure To select an effect type, press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press the [EFFECT] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off. Adjusting Effect Depth You can adjust the effect depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [EFFECT] button is held. NOTE Depth 0: no effect Depth 20: maximum effect depth NOTE Default depth settings are different for each voice. [DAMPER RES.] The Damper Resonance lets you hear a simulation of the sustain sound of the damper pedal on a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. This effect is applied to the entire sound of the instrument. NOTE Procedure Normal setting = ON Pressing the [DAMPER RES.] button repeatedly toggles the Damper Resonance on and off. Adjusting DAMPER RES. Depth You can adjust the Damper Resonance depth by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [DAMPER RES.] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [DAMPER RES.] button is held. NOTE Depth 0: no effect Depth 20: maximum depth CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 23 Selecting & Playing Voices Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH] You can select four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED — to match different playing styles and preferences. HARD: MEDIUM: SOFT: FIXED: Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. (No indicators are lit.) The fixed volume can be changed. NOTE This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. NOTE Normal setting = MEDIUM NOTE ENGLISH The touch sensitivity type will become the common setting for all voices. However, the touch sensitivity settings may have little or no effect with certain voices that are not normally responsive to keyboard dynamics. (Refer to the “Preset Voice List” on page 92.) [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons [TOUCH] button CLP-370 Procedure To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time the [TOUCH] button is pressed). No indicator is lit when “FIXED” is selected. Changing the volume when FIXED is selected When you select FIXED, you can set the volume for notes played in FIXED mode by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while you hold the [TOUCH] button. The current volume level appears on the display. The volume range is from 1 through 127. The default setting is 64. NOTE 1: minimum volume 127: maximum volume Volume range NOTE The touch volume set in FIXED mode will become the common setting for all voices. NOTE Releasing the [TOUCH] button changes the touch type. If you have changed the volume, releasing the [TOUCH] button will not change the touch type. (FIXED mode will remain selected.) 24 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Transposition — [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing a C key produces a pitch of F. In this way, you can play a song as though it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to F major. [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons CLP-370 Procedure Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] button while holding the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose down or up as required. The amount of transposition appears on the LED display while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose setting is “0.” ENGLISH [TRANSPOSE] button TERMINOLOGY Transposition The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than “0” is selected. If a value other than “0” is selected, the [TRANSPOSE] button can be switched the transpose function ON or OFF at any time. Transpose: Change the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. NOTE The transposition range: –12: –12 semitones (down one octave) 0: normal pitch 12: 12 semitones (up one octave) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 25 Selecting & Playing Voices Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. 1 2 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage Dual mode. NOTE (CLP-370/340) Press two voice buttons at the same time (or press one voice button while holding another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when Dual mode is active. • According to the voice numbering priority shown in the diagram on the right, the lower value voice number will be designated as Voice 1 (the other voice will be designated as Voice 2). Voice numbering priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 The Function mode provides access to a number of other Dual mode functions, such as volume balance setting or octave setting (page 64). (If you do not set Dual mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by default.) 2. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice button. Dual and Split (page 27) modes cannot be engaged at the same time. NOTE [VARIATION] in Dual Mode (CLP-370/340) The [VARIATION] button’s indicator will light if the variation is engaged for either or both of the Dual mode voices. While Dual mode is engaged, the [VARIATION] button can be used to turn the variation for both voices on or off. To turn the variation on or off for only one of the voices, hold the voice button for the other voice and press the button of the voice for which you want to change the variation. NOTE [REVERB] in Dual Mode The reverb type assigned to Voice 1 will take priority over the other. (If the reverb is set to OFF, Voice 2 reverb type will be in effect.) NOTE [EFFECT] in Dual Mode Depending on the conditions, one effect type may take priority over the other. Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F3 (page 64) you can adjust the depth value for each voice to your liking. 26 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Voice buttons [SPLIT] button ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage Split mode. Press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The default setting (WOOD BASS) will be selected for the left-hand voice at first. The Function mode provides access to a number of other Split mode functions (page 65). (If you make no settings for Split mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by default.) NOTE Dual (page 26) and Split modes cannot be engaged simultaneously. 2. Specify the split point (the border between the right-and left-hand range). (The split point is initially set at the F#2 key by default. If you do not need to change the split point, skip this procedure.) You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held). An example of split-point key display F2 NOTE A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. The split point can also be changed by simultaneously holding down the [SPLIT] button and pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. The default split point can be recalled by simultaneously holding down the [SPLIT] button and pressing both the [–/NO] and [+/ YES] buttons together. followed by a high bar if sharp F#2 NOTE The split point can also be set via Function 4 (page 65). Eb2 followed by a low bar if flat A -1 C1 C2 F#2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 Normal setting=F#2 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 27 Selecting & Playing Voices 3. Select a voice for the right hand. Press a voice button. 4. Select a voice for the left hand. Press the corresponding voice button while holding the [SPLIT] button. (The indicator of the Left Voice button will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed.) To turn the variation on or off for the split voice, hold the [SPLIT] button and press the [VARIATION] button or the currently-selected voice button. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. NOTE [VARIATION] in Split Mode You can turn the variation on or off for Split mode voices. Normally, the voice indicator of the right voice lights in Split mode. The [VARIATION] can be used to turn the variation for the right voice on or off as required. While the [SPLIT] button is held, however, the voice indicator of the left voice lights. In this state the [VARIATION] button turns the variation for the left voice on or off. Press the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out. ENGLISH NOTE [REVERB] in Split Mode The reverb type assigned to the right voice will take priority over the other. (If the reverb of the right voice is set to OFF, the left voice’s reverb type will be in effect.) NOTE [EFFECT] in Split Mode Depending on the conditions, one effect type will take priority over the other. The depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F4 (page 65) you can change the depth value for each voice as you like. Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button — will be applied to the right voice only. 28 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Using the Metronome The Clavinova features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for practicing. 1 2 [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons CLP-370 ENGLISH [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▲▼] buttons Procedure 1. Start the metronome. The metronome sound is turned on by pressing the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. The beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons (when the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] button’s [TEMPO] indicator is lit). Adjusting the time signature The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. You can set the beat from 0 to 15. The current setting Beat appears on the LED display while you are holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. A beat setting of “0” plays a low click sound for all beats, while a setting of “1” plays a high click sound for all beats; other beat settings play a high click for the first beat in a measure and a low click for all following beats. NOTE If the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button’s [TEMPO] indicator is not lit, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to light the [TEMPO] indicator. NOTE The volume of the metronome can be adjusted via the Metronome Volume function in Function mode (page 67). 2. Stop the metronome. Turn off the metronome by pressing the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 29 Recording Your Performance ENGLISH Recording Your Performance The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the instrument can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two parts separately, you could record the left-and right-hand parts separately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they sound when played back. The two-part Song Recorder on the instrument allows the recording of up to three User songs (U01 – U03) to the instrument. User songs can be saved to an optional USB storage device. Recording a performance quickly This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without specifying the recording parts — useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces. In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to right part. 24 4 3 CLP-370 CAUTION To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s): If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song. Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data. You cannot record the performance to the connected USB storage device directly. The recorded songs are saved to the instrument automatically. If you want to save data to the device, perform the Save operation (page 37) after stopping recording. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. The Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. 30 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Procedure 1. Make all the initial settings. Before you begin to record, select the voice you want to record (or voices if you will be using Dual or Split mode). Make any other desired settings (reverb, effect, etc.) as well. You might also want to set the volume. You can also adjust the playback volume using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. 2. Engage Record Ready mode. NOTE When the instrument is in Demo Song mode or during a file operation, Record mode cannot be engaged. Press the [REC] button to engage Record Ready mode. This automatically selects an empty song for recording and makes the RIGHT part active. If an empty song does not exist, Song U01 will be selected. Recording does not actually start yet. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will flash at the current METRONOME tempo setting. You can turn on the metronome in this step, and adjust the tempo by using the If you have selected the LEFT part previously in the same song, the LEFT part will automatically be made active when pressing the [REC] button in step 2. ENGLISH NOTE Recording capacity You can record up to a maximum three songs, or up to a maximum of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in each song on the instrument depending on pedal usage and other factors. NOTE [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons. (Range: 32 – 280) Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button again. 3. Start recording. Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The current measure’s number will appear on the display while recording. NOTE If the metronome was on when you started recording, you’ll be able to keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound will not be recorded. NOTE For more recording information, see page 34. NOTE The left pedal can be assigned to start recording via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66. 4. Stop recording. Press either [REC] or SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. When recording is stopped, dashes appear in the display in succession to indicate that the recorded data is being saved to the instrument automatically. After the data is saved, the song name (U01 – U03) appears in the display. The recorded part’s indicator will glow green to indicate that it now contains data. (Record mode is disengaged automatically.) NOTE If the memory becomes full during recording, “FUL” will appear on the display and recording will stop automatically. (All recorded data up to that point will be retained.) CAUTION Do not turn off the power of the instrument when dashes appear in the display in succession. Doing so may delete all song data in the instrument, including external songs (page 43). CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 31 Recording Your Performance Playing back a recorded song Procedure 1. Play back the recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. ENGLISH 2. Stop the performance. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button. Re-recording a previously recorded song This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 1 on page 31 if you wish to change the previous settings. For more information of the recorded data see page 34. 2. Re-engage Record Ready mode. Press the [REC] button, again. The selected part’s indicator lights in red. Follow the procedure from Step 3 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31 to re-record. Deleting a selected part Pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording, then pressing the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording will erase all previously recorded data on the selected part. 32 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE If you want to change the tempo, reverb type, or effect type when re-recording a part or when recording to another part, do so after you engage Record Ready mode. You cannot re-record in the middle of a song. Recording Your Performance Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts This lets you record the right and left parts separately. Since you can record the left part while playing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet. NOTE Procedure Part button indications Off: Contains no data On (green): Contains data On (red): Part is enabled for recording 1. Make all the initial settings. 2. Select a song to record. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to light “USER” indicator on, then press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song for recording. Recording capacity You can record up to a maximum three songs, or up to a maximum of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in each song on the instrument depending on pedal usage and other factors. ENGLISH NOTE Same as step 1 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31. NOTE CAUTION To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s): If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song. Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data. 3. Engage Record Ready mode. If the metronome was on when you started recording, you’ll be able to keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound will not be recorded. NOTE Press the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button to engage Record Ready mode. Recording does not actually start yet. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will flash at the current METRONOME tempo setting. Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button again. 4. Start and stop recording. Same as step 3 – 4 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31. If you want to change the time signature, make sure to change it before entering Record Ready mode. If you want to change the tempo, reverb type, or effect type when rerecording a part or when recording to another part, do so after entering Record Ready mode. The Time Signature of a recorded song cannot be changed. If you want to record a song with another Time Signature, first save a song to USB storage (see page 37), and delete the recorded both parts of the song (see page 32, Deleting a selected part), then set the desired time signature, and begin a new recording. NOTE If you don’t want to hear the previously recorded part while you record (for example, when you want to record a song different from what you recorded on the previous part), press the playback part button before pressing the [REC] button so that its indicator is turned off. For more information on recording, see page 34. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 33 Recording Your Performance ENGLISH The user song recorder records the following data: Data in addition to the notes and voices you play is recorded. This data includes “Individual Parts” and “Entire Song.” See below. Individual Parts • Notes played • Voice selection • [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340) • Pedal (Damper/Soft/Sostenuto) • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] depth • Dual mode voices • Dual balance (F3) • Dual detune (F3) • Dual octave shift (F3) • Split mode voices (F4: CLP-370/340) • Split balance (F4: CLP-370/340) • Split octave shift (F4: CLP-370/340) Entire Song • Tempo • Time signature (beat) • [REVERB] type (including OFF) • [EFFECT] type (including OFF) 34 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) The initial settings (data recorded at the beginning of a song) can be changed after the recording. For example, after recording, you can change the voice to create a different ambience or adjust the song tempo to your taste. You can change the following initial settings. ENGLISH Individual Parts • Voice selection • [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340) • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] depth • Dual mode voices • Split mode voices (CLP-370/340) • Damper/soft pedal depth Entire Song • Tempo • [REVERB] type (including OFF) • [EFFECT] type (including OFF) 1. Change the settings via the panel controls. For example, if you wish to change the recorded voice from [E. PIANO 1] to [E. PIANO 2], press the [E. PIANO 2] button. 2. Engage Record mode and select a part to change the initial settings. The indicator glows red. (Data shared by two parts can be changed via either part.) CAUTION Be careful not to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button or a key on the keyboard, either of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the selected part. 3. Press the [REC] button to exit Record mode. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 35 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device You can handle User songs (save, load, and delete) with a USB storage device. You can also format the device or media. ENGLISH Before using a USB device, read the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 41. NOTE For details on connecting a USB storage device, see page 73. NOTE Before handling songs with a USB storage device, make sure that the device is not protected. If the device is protected, you cannot access it. About Save and Load Save You can save three User songs in the instrument to the USB storage device as SMF song files. These songs can be saved to a “container” (or memory location) in the USB storage device. 100 containers are available — S00 – S99. Since the User songs are saved in SMF format, they can be played back on other instruments, including other Clavinovas. Memory location User song (Internal memory) NOTE If there is not enough capacity left on the USB storage device to save or export the data, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to save or export the data. Delete unwanted files from the device to make more memory available (page 39), or use another device. USB storage device NOTE Save User Song 1 (U01) SMF Song 0 (S00) User Song 2 (U02) SMF Song 1 (S01) User Song 3 (U03) SMF Song 2 (S02) The file numbers which can be handled in this instrument are 100 files. • SMF song numbers: S00 – S99 SMF Song 99 (S99) Load If you want to only play the song in the USB storage device, the following operation is not necessary. For instructions on playing the song, see “Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device” on page 45. The Load operation can be used if you want to edit the recorded song on the instrument. Data can be loaded to User Song 3 (U03). Memory location User song (Internal memory) User Song 1 (U01) USB storage device Load SMF Song 0 (S00) User Song 2 (U02) SMF Song 1 (S01) User Song 3 (U03) SMF Song 2 (S02) SMF Song 99 (S99) 36 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE The “S” indication at the top of the User file name represents “SMF.” TERMINOLOGY SMF (Standard MIDI File): The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. The SMF format for sequence files allows you to exchange song data between different sequencers. User songs recorded on the Clavinova are SMF Format 0. Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Saving a Song 1 23 1 2 CLP-370 NOTE 1. Select a User song to save. Select a User song to save by using the [SONG SELECT] and [–/NO][+/YES] buttons. 2. Select a song container in the device and save the User song. If the selected song has no data, the song will not be saved (you cannot select a container for SMF songs — S00 – S99). Confirm that the selected song has data by making sure that the indicator of [RIGHT] or [LEFT] is turned on. ENGLISH Procedure After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, press the [FILE] button (the “SAVE TO USB” indicator lights). Then, while holding the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a container (S00 – S99). After releasing the [FILE] button, “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display. Press the [+/YES] button to save the songs. The song is saved into the “USER FILES” folder and named as “USERSONGxx.MID.” Overwriting the song If you select a container which contains an SMF song, three dots appear in the display (ex., “S.0.0.”). If you do not want to overwrite the file, press the [–/NO] button when “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display and select another container. If you want to overwrite the song, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to overwrite the file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the FILE LOAD LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 3. Exit from the file operation mode. Press the [FILE] button several times to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators turn off.) Play the recorded song (see page 43). CAUTION Do not rename User files on a computer. If the file name is changed in this way, the file cannot be loaded to the instrument. NOTE If you move an SMF song from the “USER FILES” folder to the top folder using a computer, the file type will be changed — from a SMF song (S00 – S99) to an External song. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 37 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Loading a Song 13 12 CLP-370 ENGLISH Procedure CAUTION If the User file (U03) on the instrument already contains data, this operation can result in overwriting of the data. Make sure to save important data to your computer beforehand. 1. Select a song container in the device. After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, press the [FILE] button (the “LOAD TO USER.” indicator lights). Then, while holding the [FILE] button, press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song (S00 – S99). Data saved on the instrument can only be loaded back to the instrument. 2. Load a song to User Song (U03). “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display. Press the [+/YES] button to load a song. The file will automatically be loaded into the User Song (U03). The indication “-” moves from left to right in display, indicating that save operation is in process. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. CAUTION Do not manually change the file name on the USB storage device by using a computer; doing so will render the file unplayable or unable for loading on the instrument. CAUTION Do not turn off the power to the instrument while flashing dashes appear in the display (indicating the operation is in process). Doing so may damage the data. When loading is completed, the “End” indication appears in the display, and the song is loaded into the User Song (U03). 3. Exit from the load operation mode. Press the [FILE] button to exit the load operation mode. (The “FILE” indicators turn off.) 38 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Deleting Song Files 13 12 CLP-370 NOTE Procedure 1. Select a song file to be deleted. Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, hold the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a file to be deleted. Two types of files will be displayed in order: • Sxx....... SMF songs • xxx....... External songs (commercially available songs or songs which have been edited on a computer) 2. Delete the file. After releasing the [FILE] button, “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display. If you want to delete the file, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to delete the file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to delete the song, press the [–/NO] button. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. NOTE Only files which contain data will be displayed. ENGLISH Audition the song to be deleted before deleting. Songs cannot be played back after engaging the Delete mode. NOTE The following types of songs cannot be deleted. If you try to delete the song, “Pro” (Protected) appears in the display. • Protected songs (extension: Cxx, Exx or SME) • Disklavier Piano Soft songs NOTE For SMF songs (Sxx), the song numbers are fixed and not changed by deleting files. However, the song numbers of External songs are not fixed and may be changed by deleting External songs. 3. Exit from the file operation mode. Press the [FILE] button to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators turn off.) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 39 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Formatting the USB Storage Device CAUTION If data is already saved to the USB storage device, be careful not to format it. If you format the device, all the previously saved data will be deleted. 13 12 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage the format mode. Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/ FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, while holding the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons. When “For” (Format) appears in the display, release the [FILE] button to display “n y” (no/yes). 2. Execute the format operation. After “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to format the device or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to format the device, press the [–/NO] button. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 3. Exit from the format mode. Press the [FILE] button to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators turn off.) 40 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/ Floppy Disk, etc.) NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Connecting USB device When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. CAUTION When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB device may be damaged. Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 40). CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. ENGLISH Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 41 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks An optional floppy disk drive can be connected to the USB jack. (CLP-370/340) For instructions on installing a Yamaha UD-FD01 floppy disk drive, see page 91. ENGLISH The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument. Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Floppy Disk Compatibility • 3.5” 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. NOTE Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Removing a Floppy Disk • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. 42 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/ Write Head • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head cleaning disks. About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). Write-protect tab open (protect position) Playing Back Songs Playing Back Songs You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (pages 30 – 35) or commercially available songs. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. Playing the voice demo tune. • 50 Piano Preset Songs .............................................................................. page 17 50 Piano Preset Songs in the instrument. • User songs in the instrument .................................................................... page 44 User songs which you recorded to the instrument by using the record function (pages 30 – 35). • External songs in the instrument .............................................................. page 44 Songs transferred from a computer (including commercially available songs and songs which have been edited on a computer). Songs can be transferred (saved) to the instrument by using the Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). The songs are saved to an area of the internal memory separate from the area for recorded User songs. Up to 255 songs can be played back on this instrument (numbers 001 – 255). • User Songs saved from the instrument in the USB storage device.......... page 45 SMF songs which have been saved from the instrument to a USB storage device (page 37). • External songs in the USB storage device................................................. page 45 Commercially available songs or songs which have been edited on a computer, etc. and stored to a USB storage device. Up to 999 songs can be played back on this instrument (numbers 001 – 999). • Internet songs from the website (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ........... page 46 Connect the instrument to the Internet and play back from the Internet. NOTE When playing back songs containing various voices or parts (such as XG or GM songs), the voices may not sound correct or as intended on the original. You may be able to remedy this and make the playback sound more natural or appropriate by changing the Song Channel Selection setting (page 66) to “1&2,” so that only channels 1 and 2 will play back. NOTE ENGLISH • The Demo Songs ....................................................................................... page 16 If the song cannot be selected or loaded, you may need to change the Character Code setting (page 70). NOTE Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connections. However, channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier Piano Soft songs and non-protected External songs will be transmitted via the MIDI connections when the Song Channel Selection is set to “1&2” (page 66). NOTE For the USB storage device, folder directories on this instrument can be recognized up to two levels. However, the level is not displayed and song numbers 001 – 999 are displayed whichever level the song contains. NOTE Sequence formats that can be played • SMF (Standard MIDI File) Formats 0 and 1 The SMF format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. The SMF format for sequence files allows you to exchange song data between different sequencers. User songs recorded in this instrument are saved as SMF Format 0. If the metronome is being used during playback, the metronome will automatically stop when playback is stopped. NOTE If the REVERB type is changed via the panel controls during playback, both the playback and keyboard reverb effects will be changed. NOTE • ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. Among ESEQ files, Disklavier Piano Soft songs can be played back on this instrument. If the EFFECT type is changed via the panel controls during playback, the playback effect may be switched off in some cases. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 43 Playing Back Songs Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument 321 1 CLP-370 ENGLISH Procedure 1. Select the desired song. Press the [SONG SELECT] button (the USER indicator lights). Then press the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons to select a song. The User songs are displayed as “Uxx*” and External songs in the instrument are displayed as “xxx.” *The “U” indication in the User song name means “User.” The letters “xx” represent the song number. 2. Start playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The current measure number appears on the display during playback. NOTE User song playback cannot be started when the recorder contains no data. NOTE • You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting a voice from the panel. You can also enjoy playing duets with yourself by recording one part of a duet or a song for two pianos, then playing the other part while the recorded part plays back. Adjust the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume. Adjust the tempo You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. 44 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE If you have External songs in the instrument, you can use the repeat function. ALL: Play all External songs in sequence. rnd: Play all External songs continuously in random order. NOTE For instructions about how to load the songs from the computer (refer on page 76). Playing Back Songs Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device 21 1 CLP-370 Procedure ENGLISH 1. Select the desired song in the USB storage device. After making sure that the device is connected to the instrument, press the [SONG SELECT] button (the USB indicator lights). Then press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] buttons to select a number of the song you want to play (the number will appear on the LED display “Sxx*” or “xxx*”), or select the playing method RND* or ALL*. *The “S” indication in the display represents “SMF” songs. The letters “xx” represent the song number. *The “xxx” indication in the display represents External songs. RND (r n d)*: Play all preset songs continuously in random order. ALL*: Play all preset songs in sequence. 2. Start and stop playback. Same as steps 2 and 3 in “Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument” on page 44. Useful Playback Functions Turning part playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for parts that contain data (one of [RIGHT] [LEFT] or both) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these part buttons turns off the indicators, and the data on those parts is not played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. Starting playback automatically when you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Sync Start” function. To engage the Sync Start function, press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button while holding down the SONG [STOP] button. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] lamp will flash at the current tempo. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. This function is useful when you wish to match the timing of the beginning of the playback sound and the start of your own performance. NOTE Parts can be turned on or off before or during playback. TERMINOLOGY Sync: Synchronized; occurring at the same time Assigning the PLAY/PAUSE function to the left pedal The left pedal can also be assigned to song play/pause operation via the “Left Pedal Mode” (page 66). This is convenient for starting playback of the song anytime after you have started playing. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 45 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/ 340, CLP-S308/S306) This feature lets you directly connect your instrument to the Internet. A service in the special Yamaha website enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music. Here in this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the “Glossary of Internet Terms” on page 57. ENGLISH Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For the latest services and the specific instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible devices etc.), refer to the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router) Modem* No router capability Router Cable type LAN cable [LAN] port * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE Connect the LAN cable to the [LAN] port. NOTE Some types of modems require an optional Ethernet hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). NOTE LAN cable 46 NOTE Depending on the Internet connection, you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect with the instrument. If in doubt, check your contract or contact your provider. Due to EU regulations, users within Europe should use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent electromagnetic interference. Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) NOTE Modem* Router capability LAN cable Connect the LAN cable to the [LAN] port. LAN cable [LAN] port ENGLISH * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Connection example 3: Wireless connection (using a wireless game adaptor) NOTE Modem* Connect the wireless game adaptor to the [LAN] port. Access point NOTE In addition to the modem or an access point, this connection requires a router. [LAN] port Wireless Game Adaptor * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Connection example 4: Wireless connection (using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) NOTE Modem* Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Access point NOTE In addition to the modem or an access point, this connection requires a router. USB Wireless LAN Adaptor USB [TO DEVICE] terminal NOTE * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. This instrument is encrypted in WEP format only. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 47 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Connecting the Instrument to the Internet If you are using a connection by cable (using DHCP): ENGLISH You do not need to make settings on the instrument. You can access the Internet simply by connecting a router or a modem equipped with a router to the instrument via a LAN cable. Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG SELECT] button. You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56. If you are using a connection by cable (using static IP address, proxy server): You need to make Internet settings on the instrument. For instructions on making Internet settings, see “About the Internet Settings” on page 49. If you are using a wireless LAN (using a wireless game adaptor): You do not need to make settings on the instrument. You can access the Internet simply by connecting a wireless game adaptor to the instrument. * The wireless game adaptor requires settings such as the access point. For information about how to make settings, read the owner’s manual for the product you are using. Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG SELECT] button. You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56. If you are using a wireless LAN (using a USB wireless LAN adaptor): You need to make Internet settings from a computer; settings cannot be made on the instrument. For instructions on making Internet settings, see “About the Internet Settings” on page 49. 48 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE The most common routers and modems equipped with a router have a DHCP function. Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) About the Internet Settings You can conveniently make Internet settings for your instrument from the special Yamaha website. If you select a wireless connection using the USB wireless LAN adaptor or a connection by cable (using static IP address or proxy server), you need to make Internet settings explained as follows. NOTE You do not need to make the Internet settings here if you are using a connection by cable (using DHCP) or a wireless LAN (using a wireless game adaptor). Internet Settings Access the special Yamaha website ENGLISH When you use the Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the first time, you should make the Internet settings according to the following illustration flow. This flow is shown to make you easily understand how to load the setting file created by the computer to your instrument. By following this flow, you won’t need to make difficult settings such as typing various data on your instrument. USB Flash Memory Save the file Create the Internet to USB flash memory setting file Load the file to the instrument For details, refer to the Yamaha webpage: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Creating the Internet Setting Files You need to create the Internet setting files on the special Yamaha webpage using your computer before making the Internet settings. For information about how to create the Internet setting files, read the instructions on the Yamaha webpage: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ NOTE The Internet settings will be backed up. Loading the Internet Setting Files This procedure lets you make Internet settings by loading the Internet setting files created on the special Yamaha webpage to the instrument. 5 1 24 3 5 CLP-370 NOTE Procedure You can create the Internet setting files (named “config.n21”) on the special Yamaha webpage. 1. Engage the Function mode. Make sure that the USB flash memory device containing the saved Internet setting file named “config.n21” is connected to the instrument, and then press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the [FUNCTION] indicator lights. NOTE The Load mode cannot be engaged while voice demo song playback is in use, when the [REC] button is on, or when user song playback is active. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 49 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) 2. Select Function F9.y (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.y (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.y (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.y (CLP-S308/S306). 3. Enter the Sub-modes Selection mode following the F9 or F8. Press the [+/YES] button to enter the Sub-modes Selection mode. ENGLISH 4. Select Function F9.1 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.1 (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.1 (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.1 (CLP-S308/S306). If you do not want to load the file, press the [–/NO] button. 5. Start loading. Press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to load the file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to load the file, press the [–/NO] button. When loading from the USB flash memory device is completed, an “End” message will appear on the display. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this display. Once loading is completed, you are now ready to access the Internet. Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel will be shown on the display when you select “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG SELECT] button. For instructions on listening to the songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56. 50 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE If loading is not successfully completed, an “Err” message and the error code will appear alternately on the display. To return to the previous indication, press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. NOTE Error Code You can check the description for the error code on the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ NOTE Yamaha recommends that you back up the Internet setting files (page 78). Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) You can check the field strength on the display, if you are using a USB wireless LAN adaptor (Connection example 4 on page 47). Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). NOTE The field strength can be displayed after making the Internet connection. NOTE Procedure 1. Select Function F9.3 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.3 ENGLISH If you are using a wireless game adaptor, the display pattern for “No wireless LAN is used” will appear. (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.3 (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.3 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button The field strength indication will appear on the display for about three seconds. Field Strength Indications Radio Status Display No signal is present. Field strength: Weak Field strength: Medium Field strength: Strong No wireless LAN is used. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 51 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Exporting the Connection Information This procedure lets you export the detailed information on the current connection as a text file to a USB flash memory device. You can check the information on your computer. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). NOTE The connection information file does not allow you to manually make Internet settings. The connection information file is set to “read only” and cannot be edited. ENGLISH Procedure 1. Select Function F9.2 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.2 (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.2 (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.2 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Turn on the Export mode. Press the [+/YES] buttons so that “OUt” appears on the display. If you do not want to export the file, press the [–/NO] button. NOTE The export mode cannot be engaged while voice demo song playback is in use, when the [REC] button is on, or when user song playback is active. NOTE If exporting has not successfully been completed, an “Err” message and the error code will appear alternately on the display. NOTE 3. Start exporting. Press the [+/YES] button. A “n y” appears in the display to confirm whether you wish to export the file or not, press the [+/YES] button again. If you do not want to export the file, press the [–/NO] button. A “n–y” message will appear on the display if a USB flash memory device contains a file with the same name as the one you are attempting to export. Press the [+/YES] button to execute the overwriting operation. Press the [–/NO] button to cancel exporting. When exporting to the USB flash memory device is completed, an “End” message will appear on the display. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this display. After exporting, connect the USB flash memory device to your computer, and then open the text file named “ConnectionInfo.txt” in the root directory of the USB flash memory device to check the detailed connection information. 52 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Error Code You can check the description for the error code on the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Other Internet Operations Checking the version number of the instrument You can check the version number of this instrument. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). 1. Select Function [F9.4] (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.4 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.4 (CLP370/340) or F8.4 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Call up the version number. Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display. A “PrG” message and version number “x.xx” will appear alternately on the display. ENGLISH Procedure 3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the sub-modes. 4. Exit from the Function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from function modes. Checking the version number of the LAN Port driver You can check the version number of the LAN Port driver. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). Procedure 1. Select Function F9.5 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.5 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.5 (CLP370/340) or F8.5 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Call up the version number. Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display. A “L-P” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the display. 3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes. 4. Exit from function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 53 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Checking the version number of the USB-LAN Adapter driver You can check the version number of the USB-LAN Adapter driver. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). ENGLISH Procedure 1. Select Function F9.6 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.6 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.6 (CLP370/340) or F8.6 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Call up the version number. Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display. A “L-A” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the display. 3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes. 4. Exit from function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes. 54 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Initializing Internet Settings You can initialize the Internet settings. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). NOTE 1. Select Function F9.7 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.7 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.7 (CLP370/340) or F8.7 (CLP-S308/S306). The settings of the Internet are not initialized when using the “Initializing the data” on page 58. ENGLISH Procedure 2. Enter the Initializing mode. Press the [+/YES] buttons. A “CLr” message will appear on the display. 3. Confirm the initialization. Press the [+/YES] button. A “n y” appears in the display to confirm whether you wish to initialize or not. If you do not want to initialize, press the [–/NO] button. 4. Execute the initialization. Press again the [+/YES] buttons. Start the initialization. When initialization is completed, an “End” message appears on the display. NOTE Information of the cookies will be initialized at the same time. 5. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes. 6. Exit from function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes. CAUTION Initializing restores the instrument to the factory-programmed settings for all Internet settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the Internet settings before initializing. Internet Initial Settings List The following are the default settings of this instrument. DHCP ON (available) Wireless LAN OFF (no settings) Proxy server OFF (no settings) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 55 Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Yamaha provides a special website with data service that enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music on your instrument. Before connect the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read “Internet Direct Connection” on page 46. ENGLISH 43 1 2 CLP-370 Procedure 1. Turn on the “INTERNET” lamp. Make sure that the instrument is connected to the Internet, then press the [SONG SELECT] button (the INTERNET indicator lights). The “INTERNET” access lamp flashes in red during Internet access. 2. Change the Channel. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to change the channel. The current channel setting appears on the display. NOTE You cannot select the “INTERNET” lamp while voice demo song playback is in use or the [REC] button is on. NOTE The LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. NOTE 3. Start playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback (the “INTERNET” access lamp flashes in red during Internet access). 4. Stop playback. Press the SONG [STOP] button. You can adjust the Effect Type (page 23) that is applied to the voice you play on the keyboard as well as for the song on Internet playback. The Touch sensitivity (page 24) for the keyboard voice can also be adjusted to your liking. You can also change the Brilliance type (page 22) and Reverb type (page 22) that are applied to Internet song playback. NOTE When you select a different song (or a different song is selected during chained playback), an appropriate Reverb Type will be selected accordingly. NOTE Song data from the Internet is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. NOTE The Synchro start function, Part settings and A-B Repeat function becomes effective after you play back the song once. 56 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Access point A device that acts as a communication hub for multiple wireless devices, and conventionally enables both wired and wireless LAN connections. Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, highvolume data communication. Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device—much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument. Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Link Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link. Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. WEP Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, a security protocol for wireless networks. WEP protects communication contents from being intercepted. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection. Wireless Game Adaptor (Wireless Ethernet Converter or Bridge) Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game machines, etc. equipped with [LAN] ports. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Glossary of Internet Terms 57 Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Initializing the data CAUTION When you initialize the data, all panel settings and song data will be erased and reset to the default settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the data before initializing (refer on page 78). ENGLISH Turn off the power to the instrument. Then turn the power on while holding the C7 key (highest key). 58 CAUTION Do not turn off the power to this instrument while data in internal memory is being initialized (in other words, while the “CLr” indication is shown). Doing so may corrupt the all data on the instrument. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch or selecting a scale, etc. The following parameters are available. The CLP-370/340 has nine main functions, and the CLP-330 has seven main functions, and the CLP-S308/S306 has eight main functions. Some of these main functions consist of a set of sub-modes. Function Sub-Mode CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330 CLP-S308/ S306 Reference page F1 F1 F1 62 Fine tuning of the pitch — Selecting a scale Scale F2.1 F2.1 F2.1 63 Base Note F2.2 F2.2 F2.2 63 Dual Balance F3.1 F3.1 F3.1 64 Dual Detune F3.2 F3.2 F3.2 64 Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.3 F3.3 F3.3 64 Voice 2 Octave Shift F3.4 F3.4 F3.4 64 Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.5 F3.5 F3.5 64 Voice 2 Effect Depth F3.6 F3.6 F3.6 64 Reset F3.7 F3.7 F3.7 64 Split Point F4.1 — — 65 Split Balance F4.2 — — 65 Right Voice Octave Shift F4.3 — — 65 Left Voice Octave Shift F4.4 — — 65 Right Voice Effect Depth F4.5 — — 65 Left Voice Effect Depth F4.6 — — 65 Damper Pedal Range F4.7 — — 65 Dual mode functions Split mode functions Other Functions Reset F4.8 — — 65 Left Pedal Mode F5.1 F4.1 F4.1 66 Soft Pedal Effect Depth F5.2 F4.2 F4.2 66 Sustain Sample Depth F5.3 — — 66 Keyoff Sample Volume F5.4 — — 66 Song Channel Selection F5.5 F4.3 F4.3 66 F6 F5 F5 67 Metronome volume — MIDI Functions MIDI Transmit Channel Selection F7.1 F6.1 F6.1 67 MIDI Receive Channel Selection F7.2 F6.2 F6.2 68 Local Control ON/OFF F7.3 F6.3 F6.3 68 Program Change ON/OFF F7.4 F6.4 F6.4 68 Control Change ON/OFF F7.5 F6.5 F6.5 68 Panel/Status Transmit F7.6 F6.6 F6.6 69 Initial Setup Send F7.7 F6.7 F6.7 69 Voice F8.1 F7.1 F7.1 70 MIDI F8.2 F7.2 F7.2 70 Tuning F8.3 F7.3 F7.3 70 Others F8.4 F7.4 F7.4 70 — F8.5 F7.5 F7.5 70 Backup Functions Character Code CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Parameter List 59 Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330 CLP-S308/ S306 Reference page Loading Internet Setting File F9.1 — F8.1 49 Exporting The Connection Information F9.2 — F8.2 52 Checking the Field Strength F9.3 — F8.3 51 Program Version Program Version F9.4 — F8.4 53 LAN Functions LAN port driver version F9.5 — F8.5 53 USB-LAN Adapter version F9.6 — F8.6 54 Initializing Internet Settings F9.7 — F8.7 55 Function ENGLISH LAN Settings Sub-Mode Basic Procedure in Function Mode Follow the steps below to use the functions. (If you become lost while using a function, return to this page and read the basic procedure.) 1 5 2 4 34 CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage the Function mode. Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its [FUNCTION] indicator lights. will appear on the display. (The indication of “ the status of the unit and usage.) ” varies depending on 2. Select a function. Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired function from F1 – F9 (CLP-370/340), F1 – F7 (CLP-330), F1 – F8 (CLP-S308/S306). NOTE Functions cannot be selected during Demo/Song Select/ file operation mode or when the user song recorder is in operation. NOTE To exit the Function mode, press [FUNCTION] button any time. 3. Use the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons. If the function does not include sub-modes, jump to Step 4. If the function includes sub-modes, press the [+/YES] button once to enter the respective sub-mode. 60 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE After you select the function, the current setting will be displayed when the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed for the first time. Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] 4. Operate the desired function using the following two buttons. [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] Operation Example 1 (F1. Fine tuning of the pitch) LED indication Engage the Function mode. Select a desired function. LED indication ENGLISH Selects the desired function/sub-mode. [–/NO] or [+/YES] After you select the desired function or sub-mode, set the ON/OFF, select the type, or change the value, accordingly. Depending on the setting, the default setting (which is used when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova) is recalled by pressing the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously. Change the value. Operation Example 2 (F3.1 “Dual Balance”) LED indication Engage the Function mode. Select a desired function. LED indication Engage the respective sub-mode. Select a desired sub-mode. LED indication Change the value. 5. After using the function, exit the function mode. To exit the Function mode, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its [TEMPO] indicator lights. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 61 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] About Each Function NOTE F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. 1. Engage the Function mode and select . ENGLISH 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or raise the pitch of the A3 key in approximately 0.2 Hz increments. You can also tune in about 1Hz steps (in any mode other than Function mode). To tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz increments: Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons simultaneously. C#0 A#-1 The value appears two-digit number and one decimal place. Ex. 440.2Hz is shown as 40.2 on the display. C0 Display Value 440.0 Setting range: 440.2 427.0 – 453.0 (Hz) 440.4 Normal setting: 440.6 440.0 (Hz) 440.8 TERMINOLOGY Hz (Hertz): This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. NOTE You can also use the keyboard to set the pitch (in any mode other than Function mode). To tune up (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. To tune down (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1,B -1, C0 and C#0 (three white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest (farthest left) key on the keyboard corresponds to A -1, and the highest (farthest right) key to C7. During the procedure described above, the display indicates a value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display returns to the previous indication. 62 C3 B3 B -1 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual A -1 During the procedure described above, the display indicates a value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display returns to the previous indication. Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience these tunings with the Clavinova. Equal Temperament 1. Engage the Function mode and select 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the desired tuning. Sub-mode F2.1: Scale Setting range: One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently the most popular piano tuning scale. Pure Major/Pure Minor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is based on the interval of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. Mean Tone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. The scale became popular during the late 16th century through the late 18th century, and was used by Handel. Werckmeister/Kirnberger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are often used today to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. . 1: Equal Temperament 2: Pure Major 3: Pure Minor 4: Pythagorean 5: Mean Tone 6: Werckmeister 7: Kirnberger ENGLISH F2. Selecting a Scale Normal setting: 1: Equal Temperament F2.2: Base Note If you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, you need to specify the root. (You can specify the root note with Equal Temperament selected, but it is not effective. The base note setting is effective for tunings other than the Equal Temperament tuning.) Setting range: Normal setting: • Root indication example (F) (G) followed by a high bar if sharp (A ) followed by a low bar if flat CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 63 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F3. Dual Mode Functions You can set various parameters for Dual mode to optimize the settings for the songs you play, such as adjusting the volume balance between two voices. Dual mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination. ENGLISH 1. Select the voices in Dual mode, then engage the Function mode and select . 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Dual mode function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] button to assign values. NOTE If Dual mode is not engaged, will appear instead of and you will be unable to select Dual mode functions. In this case, you can switch to the Dual mode by selecting two voices. F3.1: Dual Balance Setting range: –1, 0, 1 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for Voice 1 and Voice 2 independently. Depending on which voices you combine in Dual mode, the combination may sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. F3.5: Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.6: Voice 2 Effect Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for Voices 1 and 2 for Dual mode. (The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the [EFFECT] is ON. Function mode must be exited before the [EFFECT] can be turned ON.) F3.7: Reset Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an equal balance between the two Dual mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of Voice 2 in relation to Voice 1, and settings above “10” increase the volume of Voice 1 in relation to Voice 2.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. You can set one voice as the main voice, and another voice as a softer, mixed voice. F3.2: Dual Detune -20 – 0 – 20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) NOTE The available setting range is wider in the lower range (± 60 cents for A -1), and narrower in the higher range (± 5 cents for C7). (100 cents equal one semitone.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. Detune Voice 1 and Voice 2 for Dual mode to create a thicker sound. 64 F3.4: Voice 2 Octave Shift • “Voice 1” and “Voice 2” are explained on page 26. Sub-mode Setting range: F3.3: Voice 1 Octave Shift CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual This function resets all Dual mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. NOTE SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the Dual mode functions by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the two Dual mode voice buttons. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for Split mode. By changing the split point or other setting, you can optimize the settings for the songs you play. 1. Select the voices in Split mode, then engage the Function mode and select . 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Split mode function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] button to assign values. NOTE If Split mode is not engaged, will appear instead of and you will be unable to select Split mode functions. Also note that you must exit Function mode before you can engage Split mode. Sub-mode F4.1: Split Point Setting range: The entire keyboard Normal setting: F 2 Set the point on the keyboard that separates the right and left-hand sections (split point). The pressed key is included in the left-hand range. • Instead of pressing the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons, you can engage the split point by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. • If Function mode is not engaged, you can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (page 27). • An example of a key name indication for a split point (F2) followed by a low bar if flat F4.2: Split Balance Setting range: F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift Setting range: –1, 0, 1 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for the Right Voice and Left Voice independently. Make a setting depending on the note range of the songs you play. You can make this setting for each combination of voices individually. F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the left and right Split mode voices. The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the [EFFECT] is ON. You must exit Function mode before you can turn on an [EFFECT]. You can make this setting for each combination of voices individually. F4.7: Damper Pedal Range Setting range: ALL (for both voices) 1 (for the right Voice) 2 (for the left Voice) Normal setting: ALL The Damper Pedal Range function determines whether the damper pedal affects the right voice, the left voice, or both the left and right voices in Split mode. F4.8: Reset This function resets all Split mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. (G2) followed by a high bar if sharp The volume level of the two voices combined in Split mode can be adjusted as required. You can make this setting for each combination of voices individually. ENGLISH F4. (CLP-370/340) Split Mode Functions 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an equal balance between the two Split mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the left voice in relation to the right voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the right voice in relation to the left voice.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. NOTE SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to Split mode functions by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the [SPLIT] button. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 65 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F5. (CLP-370/340) / F4. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Other Functions This section provides a variety of other functions, including letting you assign the operation of the left pedal to one of several modes, and allowing you to select specific song channels for playback. ENGLISH 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the other functions’ sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to select the desired pedal function or assign the values. Sub-mode F5.1 (CLP-370/340)/F4.1 Left Pedal Mode (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Setting range: 1. Soft Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing. 2. Song Play/Pause This mode allows you to start or pause song playback. In this mode, the Left Pedal functions in the same manner as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. 3. Variation (CLP-370/340) This mode enables you to switch the Voice’s variation on or off. In this mode, the left pedal functions in the same manner as the [VARIATION] button on the panel. Normal setting: 1 (Soft Pedal) F5.2 (CLP-370/340)/F4.2 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Soft Pedal Effect Depth Setting range: 1 – 5 Normal setting: 3 This function sets the depth of the soft pedal effect. 66 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual F5.3 (CLP-370/340) Sustain Sample Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 12 The GRAND PIANO 1 voice features special “Sustain Samples” that recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of this effect. F5.4 (CLP-370/340) Keyoff Sample Volume Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 10 You can adjust the volume of the keyoff sound (the subtle sound produced when the keys are released) for voices [GRAND PIANO1], [HARPSICHORD], [E.CLAVICHORD] (including their variations). F5.5 (CLP-370/340)/F4.3 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Song Channel Selection Setting range: ALL, 1&2 Normal setting: ALL The setting here only affects Disklavier Piano Soft songs, and non-protected External songs. You can specify which song channels will play back on this instrument. When “ALL” is selected, channels 1 – 16 will be played back. When “1&2” is selected, only channels 1 and 2 will be played back, while channels 3 – 16 will be transmitted via MIDI. Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] You can change the volume of the metronome sound. Use this function to adjust the metronome volume. 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the metronome volume as required. Setting range: 1 – 20 Normal setting: 10 NOTE SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the metronome functions (CLP-370/ 340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) by pressing the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION] button while holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. To exit the Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. F7. (CLP-370/340) / F6. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Functions You can make detailed adjustments to MIDI settings. For more information about MIDI, see the “About MIDI” section (page 72). All MIDI settings described below will affect the MIDI signal in and out of the USB [TO HOST] connector. 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to set a selected parameter. ENGLISH F6. (CLP-370/340) / F5. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Metronome Volume Sub-mode F7.1: (CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Transmit Channel Selection In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. Setting range: 1 – 16, OFF (not transmitted) Normal setting: 1 NOTE In Dual mode, Voice 1 data is transmitted on its specified channel. In Split mode (CLP-370/340), right voice data is transmitted on its specified channel. In Dual mode, Voice 2 data is transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In Split mode (CLP-370/340), left voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In either mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF.” NOTE Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connections. However, channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier Piano Soft songs, and non-protected External songs will be transmitted via the MIDI connections depending on the Song Channel Selection setting (page 66). CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 67 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F7.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Receive Channel Selection F7.4: (CLP-370/340)/F7.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Program Change ON/OFF In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova receives MIDI data. Setting range: ALL, 1&2, 1 – 16 Normal setting: ALL Normally the instrument will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly-numbered voice to be selected on the corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not change). The instrument will normally also send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly-numbered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers. This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be selected on the instrument without affecting the external MIDI device. ENGLISH NOTE ALL: “Multi-timbre” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception of different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, enabling the Clavinova to play multi-channel song data received from F7.6 (CLP-370/340)/ F6.6 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) or sequencer. 1&2: “1&2” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception on channels 1 and 2 only, enabling the Clavinova to play 1 and 2 channel song data received from a music computer or sequencer. NOTE Program change and other like channel messages received will not affect the instrument’s panel settings or the notes you play on the keyboard. NOTE No MIDI reception occurs when Demo mode is engaged or during file operations. F7.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Local Control ON/OFF “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control On,” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN terminal. Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON NOTE For information on program change numbers for each of the Instrument’s voices, Refer to MIDI Data Format on the web site. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON F7.5: (CLP-370/340)/F7.5: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Control Change ON/OFF Normally the CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on the corresponding channel to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice is not affected). The CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 also transmits MIDI control change information when the pedal or other appropriate controls are operated. This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission so that, for example, the CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306’s pedal and other controls can be operated without affecting an external MIDI device. NOTE For information on control changes that can be used with the CLP370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306, refer to the MIDI Data Format in our manual library at the following website. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON 68 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F7.6: (CLP-370/340)/ F7.6: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Panel/Status Transmit F7.7: (CLP-370/340)/F7.7: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Initial Setup Send This function causes all the current instrument panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal. This function lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. By transmitting the panel settings and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to the actual performance data, the instrument will be automatically restored to the same settings when the performance is played back. You can also use this function to change the settings of a connected tone generator to the same settings as the instrument. Procedure 1. Set up the panel controls as desired. 2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data. 3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP- 370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330). 4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. NOTE For a list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmitted by this function, refer to our manual library at the following website. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ NOTE Receiving the transmitted data: 1. Connect the Clavinova via MIDI to the device to which the setup data was transmitted previously. 2. Start sending the setup data from the device. The Clavinova automatically receives the setup data, which will be reflected in the panel settings. (For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the setup data should be the same model as the one that transmitted the setup data to the sequencer.) Procedure 1. Set up the panel controls as desired. 2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data. 3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP- 370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330). 4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. ENGLISH TERMINOLOGY Setup Data: Data that contains a set of panel settings for the Clavinova. will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. The following data can be sent. • Voice selection • [REVERB] type • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] type • [EFFECT] depth • Split point • Tuning (F1) • Dual detune (F3.2) NOTE For more information on transmitting and receiving setup data via MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI device. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 69 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F8. (CLP-370/340) / F7. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Backup Functions TERMINOLOGY ENGLISH Backup: You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and reverb type, so that they will not be lost when you turn off the power to the Clavinova. If the backup function is turned on, the settings at power off are effective. If the backup function is turned off, the settings in memory are erased when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial settings) will be used. (The factory setting default list is found on page 98.) However, the backup settings themselves, the contents of the user song recorder memory, character code settings and internet settings are always backed up. You can turn the backup function on or off for each function group (each of the following sub-mode functions). 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the backup function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to turn the backup function on or off. Sub-mode F9.1: (CLP-370/340)/F8.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Voice Description of sub-modes F9.1: (CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Voice • Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split <CLP-370/340>) • Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each voice combination) • Split (CLP-370/340) (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Functions for each voice combination) • Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) • Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) • Variation (CLP-370/340) (for each voice) • Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume) • Metronome (Beat, Volume < (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) settings>) F9.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI The MIDI functions ( <CLP-370/340>/ <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings) (expect for the F7.6 and F7.7 <CLP-370/340>/ and <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330>) F9.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Tuning • Transpose • Tuning ( settings) • Scale (including base note) ( settings) F9.4: (CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Others • Other functions ( <CLP-370/340>/ <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings) • BRILLIANCE setting • DAMPER RES. ON/OFF and Depth F9.2: (CLP-370/340)/F8.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI F9.3: (CLP-370/340)/F8.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Tuning F9.4: (CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Others Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: Voice: OFF MIDI – Others: ON F8.5 (CLP-370/340)/ F7.5 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Character Code If the song cannot be loaded, you may need to change the character code setting. Setting range: Int (English)/JA (Japanese) Normal setting: Int F9. (CLP-370/340)/ F8. LAN Settings (CLP-S308/S306) For details on how to set the LAN, see on pages 46 – 53, 58. 70 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Connections Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may result. CLP-370/340/330 SELECT IN L/L+R 5 CLP-370/340 only 6 4 3 TO DEVICE TO HOST R USB TO DEVICE USB CLP-370/340 only ENGLISH OUT MIDI L/L+R AUX IN 1 On the left of the panel R 2 AUX OUT THRU Show the jacks as seen when viewed from below the instrument. 3 CLP-370/340 only CLP-S308/S306 Left Right 5 4 2 1 6 1 AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks You can connect these jacks to a Keyboard amplifier system to monitor your playing. Refer to the diagram below and use cables to make the connections. The Master volume affects the AUX OUT signal. If you want to turn off the sound of the internal speakers, use the speaker switch (page 15). NOTE Use cables and plugs with no resistance. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova Keyboard amplifier AUX OUT R NOTE Do not input the sound from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. This may cause a feedback loop, and the output sound may be excessively loud. L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN Phone plug Phone plug NOTE If you want to take a mono signal via the AUX OUT jack, connect a cable to the [L/L+R] jack. Cable The sound via the internal speakers and headphones is set to the proper condition automatically (see below). Speakers sound Speakers do not sound No plugs to connected to AUX OUT jacks Plugs connected to AUX OUT jacks Speakers On Speakers Normal (Headphones Switch) Speakers Off Speakers On Speakers Normal (Headphones Switch) Speakers Off Headphones connected Optimum equalization for speakers applied Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Headphones not connected Optimum equalization for speakers applied Optimum equalization for speakers applied Flat Flat Flat Flat CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 71 Connections 2 AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connections. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. NOTE The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting affect the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [BRILLIANCE], [REVERB], and [EFFECT] settings do not. NOTE Clavinova Phone plug (standard) R L/L+R AUX IN ENGLISH If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack. OUTPUT AUX IN Phone plug (standard) Tone Generator Audio cable Plug shape depends on the device. AUX IN Phone plug (standard) LINE OUT Audio cable Tone Generator 3 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Connection to a USB storage device” on page 73. 4 USB [TO HOST] terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 75 for more information. 5 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/ reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. 6 [LAN] terminal (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Connect to the internet (see page 46). 72 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO HOST]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. NOTE MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. NOTE Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. Refer to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the Data Format on the website. For information on how to access and obtain the Data Format list, see page 3. Direct URL: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Connections Connection to a USB storage device By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Compatible USB storage devices The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE CD-ROM drive Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. NOTE Do not use a non-ID SmartMedia card. NOTE CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the “LOAD TO USER” LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Connection to a USB storage device The CLP-370/340 has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and one on the terminal at the bottom. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A Select the desired terminal Number of USB storage devices Only one USB storage device can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. This instrument can recognize only a single drive in a USB storage device. If one storage device contains more than one drive, only one drive will be automatically selected and recognized. ENGLISH A USB storage device, such as a floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, flash memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. NOTE (CLP-370/340) If you connect USB storage devices to both USB [TO DEVICE] terminals, the devices may not operate properly. NOTE Do not connect a USB hub to the instrument. SELECT USB TO DEVICE NOTE USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the bottom. When the device is mounting, the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator flashes. When the mounting operation is completed, the indicator goes off. CAUTION Remove the USB storage device from the instrument before you switch the A/B terminals. NOTE Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Export, Load, Delete or Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the FILE LOAD LED flash stops), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data. CAUTION Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] A terminal before closing the key cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device. Formatting USB storage media When executing a file-related operation with a connected USB storage device, a “For” message may appear, indicating that the device or media may be unformatted. If this happens, format the media (page 40). CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 73 Connections To protect your data (write-protect): To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. To display the data in the USB storage device To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG SELECT] button a few times until the “USB” indicator lights (page 45). Backing up your data to a computer ENGLISH ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saves internal data to a USB storage device. Instrument USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer. Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders. Computer USB storage device ■ Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files created on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device. Computer USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument. Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device 74 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Instrument Connections Connecting a Personal Computer By connecting a computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. To do this, install the USB-MIDI driver and Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). CAUTION CAUTION If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left connected. Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal on the Clavinova. Instrument USB TO DEVICE TO HOST USB [TO HOST] terminal TERMINOLOGY Driver: A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device. You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument. NOTE • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. ENGLISH When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables. After making connections, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. USB cable Computer Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/ unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 75 Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument In addition to the demo songs and the 50 piano preset songs stored in this instrument, you can play data for other song by loading it from a connected computer. To be able to use this function, you must first download Musicsoft Downloader from Yamaha website, and install it on your computer (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide”). ENGLISH System requirement for Musicsoft Downloader • OS : Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/Vista *For XP and Vista, the 32-bit version is supported, but not the 64-bit version. • CPU • Display : Intel® Pentium® or Celeron® chip of 233MHz or Higher (500 MHz or higher is recommended) or higher : 64MB or more (256MB or more is recommended) : at least 128MB of free space (at least 512MB of free space is recommended) disk capacity : 800 x 600 High Color (16-bit) • Others : Microsoft® Internet Explorer® version 5.5 or higher • Memory • Available hard Loading Song Data from a Computer to the Instrument You can load piano song data from a computer to this instrument. Also, after you record your performance on this instrument and save the recording to a computer, you can load the recording back to the instrument. This instrument can read MIDI data in SMF Format 0. However, if such data includes any information for functions that are not supported by this instrument, the instrument will not play the data correctly. For more information on loading song data from a computer to this instrument, please refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the Help file that came with Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE You can download free Musicsoft Downloader from the Yamaha website. NOTE Do not manually change the file name by using a computer; doing so will render the file unable for loading on the instrument. NOTE SMF (Standard MIDI File) This file features a popular sequence format (for recording performance data). This file is sometimes called a “MIDI file.” The file extension is MID. You can play the SMF format song using music software or a sequencer that supports SMF. This instrument also supports SMF. Requirements for song data that can be loaded from a computer to this instrument • Songs • Maximum data size • Data format : : : : user songs (loaded from instrument), SMF Format 0 songs 748KB SMF Format 0 Backuped data (loaded from instrument) File name 08CLP-M.BUP (CLP-370/340) 08CLP-ML.BUP (CLP-330) 08CLP-S.BUP (CLPS308/S306) You can play the loaded Songs (page 44). NOTE CAUTION Do not turn off the power to this instrument or unplug the instrument during data transmission. Otherwise, the data being transmitted will not be saved. Furthermore, flash memory operation may become unstable, causing the entire memory to be erased when you turn the power to the instrument on or off. 76 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Before you use this instrument, close the Musicsoft Downloader window and quit the application. Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument Transmitting Song Data from the Instrument to a Computer Musicsoft Downloader enables you to transfer the user song in this instrument to a computer. For more information on transferring song data from this instrument to a computer, please refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the Help file that came with Musicsoft Downloader. Data you can transfer from this instrument to a computer ENGLISH • User song : your recorded songs • Back up data : panel settings • Song data (once it has been loaded from the computer) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 77 Data Backup Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you save your important data to your computer by using the application Musicsoft Downloader (MSD). This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged (refer to the “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide”). ENGLISH Data that can be saved • Panel settings and recorded User songs Panel settings are the same data that can be backed up using the Backup Functions (page 70). You can save the panel settings and recorded User songs as one file. NOTE The file described in #1 at left cannot be saved to a USB storage device (CLP-370/340). • External songs received via computer. This includes external songs saved from the computer by using Musicsoft Downloader. Procedure 1. Install the USB MIDI driver and the MSD to your computer (Windows), then connect the computer and the instrument. For installation, see the separate Installation Guide. For connection, see page 75. 2. Move the data to the computer. By using the MSD, save the “CLP-xxx.BUP” file from “System Drive” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer. The “CLP-xxx.BUP” file contains the panel settings and recorded User songs. Also, if you store the external songs in the instrument from the computer, move the songs from “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer via the MSD. For instruction on using the MSD, see the Help in the MSD. To recall the settings and load the songs to the instrument, move the “CLPxxx.BUP” file and the External songs under the folders to which you saved the files. NOTE When MSD is started on a computer connected to the instrument, “con (computer connection)” appears in the display. When this indication appears, you cannot operate the instrument. NOTE The Musicsoft Downloader cannot be used when the instrument is in the following state: • During Demo mode. • During song playback. • During Record mode. • During file operation (one of the [FILE] button indicators is lit). NOTE The panel settings and User songs (CLP-xxx.BUP file) remain in the instrument after being saved to the computer. 78 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Message List Message List Message CLr Comment Displayed after factory presets are recalled. CAUTION con Displayed when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to the instrument. When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument. E01 Indicates failure in accessing the USB storage device because the device or media is damaged. E02 Displayed when the song data is damaged or not recognized. E04 Indicates that the song data is too large to be loaded. End Displayed when the current operation is completed. Err Displayed when the MIDI/USB cable is disconnected while starting Musicsoft Downloader on a computer connected to the instrument. FCL Indicates that internal memory has been cleaned up. Recorded songs, panel settings and external songs which have been loaded from a computer are cleared, because the power has been turned off before the song save or load operations were completed. ENGLISH Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “CLr” appears in the display. Doing so may delete all song data in the instrument, including external songs (page 44). CAUTION Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “FCL” appears in the display. For Indicates that the instrument has engaged format mode for the USB storage device. FUL Displayed when internal memory becomes full during song recording. Displayed when the USB storage device becomes full and the song cannot be saved. Displayed when the total amount of files has become too large. Lod Displayed when a protected song is loading. ny Confirms whether each operation is executed or not. n–y Reconfirms whether the overwriting, delete or format operation is executed or not. Pro Indicates that the USB storage device or media is protected. * Regarding the messages (and their explanations) for Internet Direct Connection, refer to the Yamaha web site: http://services.music.yamaha.com/ CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 79 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting ENGLISH Problem Possible Cause and Solution The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 14). A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument. Noise is heard from the speakers or headphones. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. • Make sure a pair of headphones is not connected to the headphones jack (when the SPEAKER switch is set to the “NORMAL” position). If the SPEAKER switch is set to the “OFF” position, set it to “NORMAL” or “ON” (page 15). • Make sure that Local Control (page 68) is ON. The speakers do not switch off when a pair of headphones is connected. The SPEAKER switch may be switched “ON.” Set the SPEAKER switch to the “NORMAL” position (page 15). The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (pages 83, 86). The speaker sound is changed. The AUX OUT jack may be connected. Make sure to disconnect the plug (see page 71). Even though a USB storage device is connected, the SONG SELECT “USB” indicator does not turn on when pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. The USB storage device may not be recognized by the instrument, depending on the device itself or the timing of the recognition. 1. (CLP-370/340) cheek the [SELECT] switch. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the bottom. 2. Check that the device is not damaged. Check that the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator flashes after connecting the USB storage device. If the indicator does not flash, the device may be damaged. 3. Check that the compatibility of the device has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 73). 4. Select SONG SELECT “USB” again. It may take a while for the instrument to recognize the USB storage device. Press the [SONG SELECT] button again to turn the “USB” indicator on. The USB storage device has hung up (stopped). • The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. Only use the devices whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 73). • Turn the instrument off and disconnect the device, then turn it back on and reconnect the device. The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,” “LOAD TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE] button flash simultaneously when a storage device is connected. Disconnect the USB storage device and turn the power of the instrument off. The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,” “LOAD TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE] button flash simultaneously for five seconds when the USB storage device is operated. Try disconnect the USB storage device once, then reconnect it. Nothing is indicated in the LED display. Press the [–/NO] or [+YES] button and try again the operation again. Options BC-100 Bench A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova. HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads. UD-FD01 USB-FDD Unit Floppy disk drive for connecting to the instrument and saving/loading data. 80 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. ENGLISH Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. Assembly Parts A 6 x 25 mm long screws x 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x 4 6 x 16 mm short screws x 6 Cord holders x 2 Foamed styrol pads Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them on the floor, then place A on top of them. Position the pads so that they will not block the speaker box on the bottom of A. 4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2 B Headphone hanger 4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2 C Headphone hanger A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side. Power cord D E CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 81 CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 3. Attach C to D and E. D Mount A. Make sure that you mount the main unit by holding the front bottom in areas that are at least 15 cm towards the center from either end and by the handles on the rear panel. C A E 1-2 ENGLISH 1-1 1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later in step 5. 1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long screws (6 x 25 mm). 2. 2-1 2-2 2-3 15 cm or further in Align the screw holes. Attach B. Depending on the model of Clavinova you purchased, the surface color of one side of B may be different from the other side. In this case, position B so that the side of the surface color most similar to D and E faces you (as you would play the instrument) Align the screw holes on the upper side of B with the bracket holes on D and E, then attach the upper corners of B to D and E by finger-tightening two thin screws (4 x 12 mm). Secure the bottom end of B using four tapping screws (4 x 20 mm). CAUTION Be extra careful not to drop or let your fingers be pinched by the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the position specified above. 4. Secure A. 4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally (as seen from the front). 4-2 Secure A by tightening six short screws (6 x 16 mm) from the front. 4-1 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were attached in Step 2-1. A Projection of A 2-1 2-3 E A B D 2-2 82 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 4-2 CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly 5. 7. Connect the pedal cord. 5-1 Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the plug into the pedal connector. 5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. PE DA 5-1 L Attach the headphone hanger. Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to attach the hanger as shown in the illustration. ENGLISH 8. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in firm contact with the floor surface. 110 127 220 6-2 240 6-1 After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. 5-2 5-3 • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. 6. 6-1 • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Check the connection. Connect the power cord. Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a voltage selector). Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 6-2 Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the plug into the power connector. • If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit and by the handles in the rear of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Key cover Hold here. Do not hold here. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 83 CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly ENGLISH CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. Assembly Parts 6 x 25 mm long screws x 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x 4 6 x 16 mm short screws x 4 Cord holders x 2 A Foamed styrol pads Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them on the floor, then place A on top of them. Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors on the bottom of A. 4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2 Headphone hanger B 4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2 C A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side. Power cord D 84 E CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Headphone hanger CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 3. Attach C to D and E. D C E A 15 cm or further in 1-2 1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later in step 5. 1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long screws (6 x 25 mm). 2. 15 cm or further in ENGLISH 1-1 Mount A. Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of the main unit when positioning it. CAUTION Attach B. Depending on the model of Clavinova you purchased, the surface color of one side of B may be different from the other side. In this case, position B so that the side of the surface color most similar to D and E faces you (as you would play the instrument). Be extra careful not to drop or let your fingers be pinched by the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the position specified above. 4. Secure A. 2-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then align the screw holes on the upper side of B with the bracket holes on D and E. 4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally (as seen from the front). 2-2 Attach the top corners of B to D and E by fingertightening two thin screws (4 x 12 mm). 4-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x 16 mm) from the front. 2-3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from outside, secure the bottom end of B using four tapping screws (4 x 20 mm). 2-4 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were attached in Step 2-2. 4-1 Projection of A A 2-2 2-4 2-1 E Place the bottom end of the rear panel on each foot. B D 4-2 Insert the screw in the front of these two holes. 2-3 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 85 CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly 5. Connect the pedal cord and power cord. Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the plug into the pedal connector. 5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. P E D A L 5-1 7. 8. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Attach the headphone hanger. Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to attach the hanger as shown in the illustration. S NE O PH ENGLISH 5-1 5-3 After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. 5-2 6-2 6. 6-1 6-1 Connect the power cord. Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a voltage selector). Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 6-2 • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Check the connection. • If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the plug into the power connector. Key cover Do not hold here. Hold here. Do not hold here. 86 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly ENGLISH CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. A Assembly Parts Protective sheet 6 x 20 mm long screws x 10 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x 5 6 x 16 mm short screws x 6 Cord holders x 2 Connector panel Foamed styrol pads Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them on the floor, then place A on top of them. Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors on the bottom of A. 4 x 14 mm thin screws x 5 CAUTION Please keep the protective sheet for later use. It will be used to protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument is transported. The protective sheet should be spread over the entire keyboard before closing the key cover. Headphone hanger 4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2 Headphone hanger B Power cord C Pedal cord D E F CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 87 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 3. Attach D to E and F. 1-1 1-3 F Mount A. 3-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of A to mount it. 3-2 Position A so that the stopper-wood on the rear side of the bottom of A will be located behind the front panel, then slide A slowly toward the rear while lightly pushing E and F toward the center. * Be sure to slide the guide pins 1 on each side of A into the guide slots 2 on E and F respectively. E D 1 ENGLISH 1-2 1-1 A 2 Attach D to E and F by using four long screws (6 x 20 mm). 1-2 Secure D from the rear using two long screws (6 x 20 mm). 1-3 Remove the twist tie from the folded pedal cord. Do not remove the twist tie that is located next to the hole. 15cm or further in 3-1 F 3-2 15cm E or further in 1 2 CAUTION 2. 2-1 2-2 Be extra careful to avoid pinching your fingers or dropping A. Temporarily mount B. CAUTION Insert B between E and F as shown in the illustration. Align and attach B to the front side of D, E and F. 2-1 2-2 F B Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. 4. 4-1 Secure A from the rear using two short screws (6 x 16 mm). 4-2 Secure A from the rear using two thin screws (4 x 14 mm). 4-3 Secure A from the front using four short screws (6 x 16mm). E D Secure A. 4-2 2-3 Temporarily secure B by finger-tightening four long screws (6 x 20mm). * Insert four screws into the larger holes (all four holes) on the brackets. 2-4 Secure B using a thin screw (4 x 14 mm). * Insert the screw into the smaller hole on the bracket. 2-4 2-3 88 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual A 4-1 4-4 4-3 Firmly tighten the screws you temporarily fastened on B in steps 2-3 above. 4-4 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly 5-1 5-2 Connect the speaker cord. 8. Remove the twist tie attaching the speaker cord. 8-1 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage. Insert the speaker cord plug into the connector so that the protruding tab on the plug faces toward right when viewed from the rear. 5-2 6. Connect the power cord. Connect the pedal cord. 6-1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the [PEDAL] connector. 6-2 Attach the cord holders to the instrument as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. At this time, be careful not to allow too much slack in the pedal cord between the plug and cord holder. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. ENGLISH 5. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. 6-1 8-2 6-2 E 9. Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC IN] connector. Set the adjuster to secure the pedals. Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in firm contact with the floor surface. 7. Attach C. 7-1 Place on D, the stopper-wood in the bottom corners of C, then attach the top of C. 7-2 Secure upper right and left of C using two thin screws (4 x 14 mm). 7-3 Secure upper center and bottom of C using five tapping screws (4 x 20 mm). 10. Attach the headphone hanger. Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to attach the hanger as shown in the illustration. 7-2 7-1 D C C 7-3 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 89 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. ENGLISH • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Check the connection. • If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. CAUTION When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched. Top portion Key cover Do not hold here. Hold here. 90 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340) Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340) The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. ENGLISH For the CLP-330 and CLP-S308/S306: The disk drive can be used with the instrument but cannot be attached as described here. When using the floppy disk drive with these models, simply put the drive on the top panel. Make sure to remove the connected disk cable before you close the key cover. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1. Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. 3. Attach the drive and case assembly to the left underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4mm x 10mm). Insert the drive to the case, with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case. 4. Connect the USB cable to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Dual-sided adhesive tape 2. Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 91 Preset Voice List Preset Voice List : Yes : No CLP-370/340 Voice Name Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 GRANDPIANO 1 ENGLISH VARIATION GRANDPIANO 2 VARIATION E.PIANO 1 VARIATION E.PIANO 2 VARIATION HARPSICHORD VARIATION E. CLAVICHORD VARIATION VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN Voice Descriptions Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also includes four levels of dynamic sampling, sustain samples, and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. Warm and mellow piano. Good for classical compositions. Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popular music. Bright, spacious piano. Good for popular or rock music. An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. Good for standard popular music. A synth-generated type electronic piano sound often heard in popular music. Used in the DUAL mode it blends well with an acoustic piano voice. The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. A slightly different electric piano sound often heard in rock and popular music. The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant tone. A hammer-struck keyboard instrument that utilizes an electric pickup that is often heard in funk and soul music. Its tone is noted for the unique sound produced when the keys are released. Includes a unique preset effect. Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. Stereo-sampled, spacious, and realistic marimba. This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet). Good for sacred music from the Baroque period. VARIATION This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.” JAZZ ORGAN The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. VARIATION Uses a rotary speaker effect with a different speed. The variations speed is faster. If the variation is selected while holding a chord, the speed of the effect will gradually change. STRINGS VARIATION CHOIR VARIATION 92 Key-Off Sampling*2 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. A choir voice with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. Preset Voice List GUITAR VARIATION WOOD BASS VARIATION E.BASS VARIATION Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet ambience of nylon strings. Bright, brilliant steel guitar. Suitable for popular music. An upright bass played fingerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin music. Adds a cymbal voice to the bass sound. Ideal for walking bass lines in jazz tunes. Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. A fretless bass good for styles such as jazz, fusion, etc. *1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument. *2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Voice Name 93 Preset Voice List : Yes : No CLP-330, CLP-S308/S306 ENGLISH Voice Name Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions GRANDPIANO 1 Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. GRANDPIANO 2 Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popular music. E.PIANO 1 An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Good for standard popular music. E.PIANO 2 The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. HARPSICHORD 1 The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. HARPSICHORD 2 Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant tone. VIBRAPHONE Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. CHURCH ORGAN 1 This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet). Good for sacred music from the Baroque period. CHURCH ORGAN 2 This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.” JAZZ ORGAN The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. STRINGS 1 Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. STRINGS 2 Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. CHOIR A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. GUITAR Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet ambience of nylon strings. *1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument. *2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released. 94 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Demo Song List Demo Song List : Included : Not included CLP-370/340 CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 Title GRAND PIANO1 Albumbard, Lyriske stykker IV, op.47-2 HARPSICHORD Concerto a cembalo obbligato, 2 violini, viola e continuo No.7, BWV.1058 HARPSICHORD1 HARPSICHORD2 Gigue, Französische Suiten Nr.5, BWV.816 CHURCH ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN1 Herr Christ, der ein’ge GottesSohn, BWV.601 CHURCH ORGAN2 Triosonate Nr.6, BWV.530 Composer E. H. Grieg J. S. Bach ENGLISH Voice Name The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts of the original compositions. All other songs are original (©2008 Yamaha Corporation). Piano Voice Demo Description (CLP-370/340) Voice Name Piano Voice Demo GRAND PIANO1 Stereo sampling GRAND PIANO2 Monaural sampling E.PIANO1 With sustain sampling E.PIANO2 Without sustain sampling HARPSICHORD With key-off sampling E.CLAVICHORD Without key-off sampling CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 95 Index Index Numerics 50 greats for the Piano .....................................................17 50 Piano Preset Songs ......................................................17 A ENGLISH A-B Repeat .......................................................................19 Adjust Tempo (50 Piano Preset Songs) ...............................17 Tempo (Recorded Songs) .........................................44 Volume (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................17 Volume (Metronome) ..............................................67 ALL (LED display) .....................................................17, 45 Assembly ..........................................................................81 Equal Temperament ........................................................ 63 Export .............................................................................. 36 F Factory Setting List .......................................................... 98 [FILE] button .................................................................. 37 Fine Tuning of the Pitch ................................................. 62 Floppy Disk Drive ........................................................... 42 Installation................................................................. 91 Format ................................................................. 40, 41, 42 Function........................................................................... 62 Basic Procedure......................................................... 60 Parameter List ........................................................... 59 AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks ...............................................72 AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks...........................................71 H Half-pedal ........................................................................ 21 B Hz (Hertz) ....................................................................... 62 Backup (Data) ..................................................................78 Backup Functions ............................................................70 I [BRILLIANCE] button ....................................................22 Internet Direct Connection ............................................ 46 Internet Settings .............................................................. 49 C Internet song.................................................................... 56 Character Code ................................................................70 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ............................26 K Connecting a Personal Computer.......................75, 76, 77 Key Cover ........................................................................ 12 Connection to a USB storage device ...............................73 Keyboard Stand ............................................................... 81 Connections .....................................................................71 Computer.......................................................75, 76, 77 USB storage device ....................................................73 Keyoff Sample Volume ................................................... 66 Connectors .......................................................................71 L D LAN Port driver ............................................................... 53 Damper Pedal ..................................................................21 [LAN] terminal................................................................ 72 Damper Pedal Range .......................................................65 [LEFT] button ........................................................... 18, 33 [DAMPER RES.] button .................................................23 Left Pedal ......................................................................... 21 Damper Resonance ..........................................................23 Left Pedal Mode............................................................... 66 Delete ...............................................................................39 Demonstration Tunes .....................................................16 List Factory Setting........................................................... 98 Functions ................................................................... 59 Preset Voice ............................................................... 94 Display .............................................................................14 Load ..................................................................... 36, 38, 45 [DEMO] button...............................................................16 Demo Song List................................................................95 Kirnberger........................................................................ 63 LAN Settings .............................................................. 49, 70 Dual mode .................................................................26, 64 M 96 E [MASTER VOLUME] slider ........................................... 15 [EFFECT] button.......................................................22, 23 Mean Tone....................................................................... 63 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Index Message List .....................................................................79 [SELECT] switch ............................................................. 73 Metronome ......................................................................29 SMF (Standard MIDI File).............................................. 36 METRONOME [ON/OFF] button ...........................67, 29 Soft Pedal ................................................................... 21, 66 Metronome Volume ........................................................67 Soft Pedal Effect Depth ................................................... 66 MIDI ................................................................................72 Song ................................................................................. 17 MIDI Functions ...............................................................67 SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button ........................... 16, 17, 44 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals ............................72 [SONG SELECT] button .......................................... 17, 44 Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ..........................................14 SONG [STOP] button............................................... 17, 44 Music Rest ........................................................................13 [SPEAKER] switch .......................................................... 15 Musicsoft Downloader ....................................................78 Specifications ................................................................. 100 [SPLIT] button ................................................................ 27 Normal setting .................................................................22 Split mode .................................................................. 27, 65 Split Point .................................................................. 27, 65 P Part Cancel .......................................................................18 Part Playback On and Off................................................45 [PEDAL] jack ...................................................................83 Pedal Play/Pause ..............................................................45 Sustain Sample Depth ..................................................... 66 Sync (Synchronized) ....................................................... 45 ENGLISH SPLIT (CLP-370/340) (Function) .................................. 65 N Sync Start ......................................................................... 18 T Pedals ...............................................................................21 [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button ................................ 29, 60 [PHONES] jacks ..............................................................15 [TOUCH] button ............................................................ 24 Piano Voice Demo Description ......................................95 Touch Sensitivity ............................................................. 24 [PLAY/PAUSE] button..............................................16, 17 Transporting ...................................................................... 6 Play/Pause playback Useful Playback Functions........................................45 [TRANSPOSE] button .................................................... 25 Playing Back Songs ....................................................43, 44 Troubleshooting .............................................................. 80 Transposition .................................................................. 25 [POWER] switch .............................................................14 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs.18 U Preset Song .......................................................................17 USB Storage Device ................................................... 40, 73 Preset Voice List.........................................................92, 94 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal .................................... 72, 73 Program version number ................................................53 USB [TO HOST] terminal ........................................ 72, 75 Pure Major .......................................................................63 USB-LAN Adapter........................................................... 54 Pure Minor.......................................................................63 Pythagorean .....................................................................63 R V [VARIATION] button .................................................... 22 Voice ................................................................................ 20 [REC] button ...................................................................31 Voice group buttons........................................................ 20 Recording .........................................................................30 Initial Settings............................................................35 RIGHT/LEFT parts....................................................33 W Re-recording ..............................................................32, 34 Werckmeister................................................................... 63 [REVERB] button ............................................................22 [RIGHT] button ........................................................18, 33 Right Pedal .......................................................................21 rnd (LED display) ......................................................17, 45 S Save.............................................................................36, 37 Scale..................................................................................63 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 97 Appendix Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen / Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica Backup Group Default Voice Variation (CLP-370/340) F7.1 OFF — OFF Split Mode (CLP-370/340) OFF F8.1 NORMAL Reverb Type Preset for each voice Reverb Depth Preset for each voice Effect Type Preset for each voice Effect Depth Preset for each voice Touch Sensitivity F7.1 — WOOD BASS Brilliance CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 GRAND PIANO 1 Dual Mode Split Mode Left Voice (CLP-370/340) CLP-370/ 340 F8.4 F7.4 F8.1 F7.1 MEDIUM Volume in the FIXED Mode 64 DAMPER RES. ON F8.4 — 6 F8.4 — DAMPER RES. Depth Metronome Metronome Time Signature OFF — — 0 (no accent) — — Tempo Transpose 120 — — 0 F8.3 F7.3 Function CLP-370/ 340 Function Default F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament) F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth F4.1 — Split Point Preset for each voice combination F2 F4.2 — Split Balance Preset for each voice combination F4.3, F4.4 — Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination F4.5, F4.6 — Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination F4.7 — F5.1 F4.1 F5.2 F4.2 F5.3 — F5.4 98 Backup Group CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 — Damper Pedal Range ALL Left Pedal Mode 1 (Soft Pedal) Soft Pedal Effect Depth 3 Sustain Sample Depth 12 Keyoff Sample Volume 10 F5.5 F4.3 Song Channel Selection ALL F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 F8.3 F7.3 F8.1 F7.1 F8.4 F7.4 F8.1 F7.1 CLP-370/ 340 Backup Group CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 Function Default F7.1 F6.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1 F7.2 F6.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL F7.3 F6.3 Local Control ON F7.4 F6.4 Program Change Send & Receive ON F7.5 F6.5 Control Change Send & Receive ON F8 F7 Backup Voice: OFF MIDI – Others: ON F8.5 F7.5 Character Code Int CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 F8.2 F7.2 Always backed up CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 99 Specifications / Technische Daten / Caractéristiques techniques / Especificaciones CLP-370 Size / Weight CLP-340 CLP-330 CLP-S308 Width 1408 mm (55-7/16") 1449 mm (57-1/16") Height [For models with polished finish] 917 mm (36-1/8") [920 mm (36-1/4")] [977 mm (38-7/16")] Height with music rest [For models with polished finish] Depth Weight [For models with polished finish] 1018 mm (40-1/16") [1019 mm (40-1/8")] 511mm (20-1/8") 1019 mm (40-1/8") [1021 mm (40-3/16")] — 514mm (20-1/4") 430 mm (16-15/16") 78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.) 69 kg (152lbs., 2 oz.) 65 kg (143lbs., 5 oz.) [81 kg (178lbs., 9 oz.)] [71 kg (156lbs., 8 oz.)] [68 kg (149lbs., 15 oz.)] Number of Keys [78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.)] 88 NW Keyboard Type Control Interface NW (Natural Wood) with Synthetic ivory keytops (Wood is used for the white keys) GH3 (Graded Hammer 3) with Synthetic ivory keytops Number of Pedal 3 7-Segment LED Sliding Music Rest Yes — AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Stereo Sustain Samples Yes — Key-off Samples Yes — Number of Polyphony (Max.) 128 14 x 2 variations 14 Reverb 4 types Brilliance 5 types Chorus Yes Dual Yes Split 100 Folding Yes Tone Generation Technology Number of Voices CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual GH3 (Graded Hammer 3) with Synthetic ivory keytops Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft Key Cover Style Music Clips (Natural Wood) with Synthetic ivory keytops (Wood is used for the white keys) Yes Display Effect (Graded Hammer 3) Yes Pedal Functions Voices GH3 Touch Sensitivity Half Pedal Cabinet CLP-S306 Yes — CLP-370 CLP-340 CLP-330 Number of Preset Songs Songs Recording Compatible Data Format Number of Songs 3 Number of Tracks 2 Data Capacity User songs (100KB X 3 (ca.11,000 notes X 3)), External songs (447KB) Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1) Recording SMF (Format 0) Yes Tempo Range 32-280 Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12 Tuning Storage Yes Scale Type 7 types Floppy Disk Drive Optional Internal Memory User songs 300KB, External songs 447KB External Device Optional Headphones x2 MIDI Connectivity [IN][OUT][THRU] AUX IN [L/L+R][R] AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] x2 (selectable) USB [TO DEVICE] x1 USB [TO HOST] Yes Yes — Yes Amplifiers 40W x 2 20W x 2 40W x 2 Speakers (16cm + 5cm) x 2 16cm x 2 (16cm + 5cm) x 2 [LAN] Amplifiers/ Speakers Speaker Boxes Bundled Software CLP-S306 50 Metronome Functions CLP-S308 Yes Yes — CD-ROM Yes Accessories Included Accessories Owner’s Manual, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection, My Yamaha Product User Registration, Bench (included or optional depending on locale) * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. * Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. * Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. * Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 101 MEMO 102 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual MEMO CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 103 MEMO 104 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUT I O N RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON,” please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Piano Model Name : CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308PE/ S306PE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE FINLAND Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB45 DIC 2164 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2008 Yamaha Corporation WN75950 109MWAP*.*-**B1 Printed in China